2018 CHEROKEE USER GUIDE
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP”
(U.S. residents only).
www.jeep.com⁄en ⁄owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) provides special oers tailored to
your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information,
just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation ⁄ Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle
by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the
“Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow
the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
media and warranty booklet by visiting:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
Jeep.com (U.S.)
Jeep.ca (Canada)
18KL-926-AA
CHEROKEE
Fourth Edition, Rev 1
User Guide
Important
Get warranty and other information online – you can
review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada)
homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable
year, make and model of your vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take their attention o the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver
while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be
done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or
texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply
with all local laws.
Driving and Alcohol
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and
your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Jeep
brand
vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
source for common questions. However, it is not a
substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance
procedures and important safety messages, please
consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the back cover
and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply
to your vehicle. For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada)
or your local Jeep
brand dealer.
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA
US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents
precision workmanship, distinctive styling,
and high quality.
ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibil-
ity and assume all risks related to the use of
the features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use the features and applications when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result
in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
This guide illustrates and describes the op-
eration of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This guide may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this guide that are not available
on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifi-
cations and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on prod-
ucts previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help
you quickly become acquainted with the im-
portant features of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your Jeep
®
vehicle
best, has factory-trained technicians and
genuine MOPAR
®
parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO FIND YOUR
OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE
This publication has been prepared as a ref-
erence item to help you quickly become ac-
quainted with the most important features
and processes of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information and procedures.
This User Guide is not a replacement for the full
Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every
operation and procedure possible with your ve-
hicle.
For more detailed descriptions of the topics
discussed in this User Guide, as well as
information covering features and processes
not covered in this User Guide, the full ve-
hicle Owner’s Manual can be accessed for
free online in a printer-friendly PDF format.
To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable
supplement for your vehicle, follow the appro-
priate web address below:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html
(U.S. Residents)
http://owners.mopar.ca/ (Canadian Residents)
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our
environment and natural resources. By con-
verting from paper to electronic delivery for
the majority of the user information for your
vehicle, together we greatly reduce the de-
mand for tree-based products and lessen the
stress on our environment.
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are
given, these must be intended as regarding
an occupant in the driver's seat. Special
cases not complying with this rule will be
properly specified in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by
way of example only: this might imply that
some details of the image do not correspond
to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.
In addition, the User Guide has been con-
ceived considering vehicles with steering
wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible
that on vehicles with steering wheel on the
right side, the position or construction of
some controls is not exactly mirror-like with
respect to the figure.
To identify the chapter with the information
needed you can consult the index at the end
of this User Guide.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi-
cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd
page. A few pages further there is a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the
relevant symbols in the tabs. There is always
a textual indication of the current chapter at
the side of each even page.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored la-
bels whose symbols indicate precautions to
be observed when using this component.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out
of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may
roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneu-
vers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to oper-
ate this vehicle safely may result in a colli-
sion, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or
fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government
notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In
a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi-
cantly more likely to die than a person wear-
ing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
Rollover Warning Label
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
While reading this User Guide you will find a
series of WARNINGS to be followed to pre-
vent incorrect use of components which
could cause accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be fol-
lowed to prevent against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
VEHICLE CHANGES/
ALTERATIONS
IMPORTANT: Any change or alteration of the
vehicle might seriously affect its safety and
road holding, thus causing accidents, in
which the occupants could even be fatally
injured.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
3
4
6
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents
2 — Multifunction Lever
3 — Steering Wheel
4 — Instrument Cluster
5 — Windshield Wiper Lever
6 — Glove/Storage Compartment
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
8
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Power Window Switches 4 — Switch Bank 7 — Seats
2 — Ignition Start/Stop Button 5 — Climate Controls
3 — Uconnect Radio 6 — Gear Selector
9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS .....................13
KeyFob.....................13
IGNITIONSWITCH............15
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) —
If Equipped ..................15
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition .......15
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IFEQUIPPED................17
General Information .............17
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IFEQUIPPED................17
Rearming Of The System ..........17
To Arm The System .............18
To Disarm The System ............18
DOORS ....................18
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . .18
Locking The Doors With One Or More
Doors Open...................22
Auto Relocking ................22
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ...................22
SEATS.....................22
Memory Seat .................22
Heated/Ventilated Seats ...........23
HEADRESTRAINTS...........24
Front Adjustment ...............25
Front Removal .................25
Rear Adjustment ...............26
Rear Removal .................27
STEERING WHEEL............27
Adjustment ..................27
Heated Steering Wheel............28
MIRRORS ..................28
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . .28
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .......29
EXTERIORLIGHTS ...........29
Headlight Switch ...............29
Headlights ...................29
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped ..................29
High Beams ..................29
Flash-To-Pass .................30
Automatic Lighting ..............30
Parking Lights .................30
Headlight Delay ...............30
Front Fog Lights................30
Turn Signals ..................31
Lane Change Assist .............31
WIPER AND WASHERS ........31
Front Wipers .................31
Rain Sensing Wipers .............32
Rear Wiper ...................33
CLIMATECONTROLS..........34
Climate Controls With A Touchscreen
Overview ....................34
Climate Control Functions ..........40
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ..................41
Operating Tips .................41
WINDOWS.................43
Power Window Controls ...........43
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection ...................43
Reset Auto-Up .................44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
11
Window Lockout Switch ...........44
POWER SUNROOF ...........44
Opening.....................45
Closing .....................45
Wind Buffeting ................45
Power Sun Shade ...............45
Pinch Protection Feature ..........46
Sunroof Maintenance.............46
HOOD.....................46
Opening The Hood ..............46
Closing The Hood ...............47
LIFTGATE ..................47
Opening.....................47
Closing .....................48
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER(HOMELINK).........48
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink ...................49
Erasing All The HomeLink
Channels ....................49
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .....50
Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener ..................50
Programming HomeLink To A
Miscellaneous Device ............51
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink
Button......................51
General Information .............52
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ........52
Power Outlets .................52
Power Inverter ................55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
12
KEYS
Key Fob
The key fob operates the ignition switch.
Insert the square end of the key fob into the
ignition switch located on the instrument
panel and rotate to the desired position. The
key fob also contains an emergency key,
which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a keyless
ignition system. The ignition system consists
of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
and a START/STOP push button ignition sys-
tem. The Remote Keyless Entry system con-
sists of a key fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature if equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate from distances up to ap-
proximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld
key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
• This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as
long as the key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a
back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side oppo-
site of the emergency key) of the key fob
Key Fob
1 — Liftgate
2 — Lock
3 — Unlock
4 — Panic
5 — Remote Start
6 — Emergency Key Release
7 — Emergency Key
13
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a
backup method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key
fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key)
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the
key fob once to unlock the driver's door or
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors
and the liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on
the first push of the unlock button. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked by key fob, and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the ve-
hicle will re-lock and if equipped, the secu-
rity alarm will arm. To change the current
setting, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Mul-
timedia" in the Owner’s Manual for further
information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key
fob to lock all doors and liftgate.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate
is open, the doors will lock. The doors will
unlock again automatically if the key is left
inside the passenger compartment, other-
wise the doors will stay locked.
Key Fob
1 — Liftgate
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
14
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is pro-
grammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro-
grammed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remem-
ber to place the ignition in the OFF
mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If
Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has four
operating positions, three with detents and
one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary con-
tact position. When released from the START
position, the switch automatically returns to
the ON/RUN position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as
long as the key fob is in the passenger com-
partment.
The push button ignition operating modes are
OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
15
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a
low or dead battery. In this situation, a back
up method can be used to operate the igni-
tion switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against
the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central lock-
ing, alarm, etc.) are still available.
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• Start the engine.
NOTE:
The vehicle will not start if the key fob is
located inside the cargo area and the liftgate
is opened.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
START/STOP Ignition Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
16
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
For further information, refer to "Starting The
Engine" in "Starting And Operating."
REMOTE STARTING
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Push the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the re-
mote start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the START/STOP
button to turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode.
NOTE:
• With remote start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode.
• The vehicle must be started with the key
after two consecutive timeouts.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
— IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the ve-
hicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized op-
eration. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm
will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
• The horn will pulse.
• The turn signals will flash.
• The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action
is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security
alarm will turn the horn off after approxi-
mately 90 seconds, and then the vehicle
security alarm will rearm itself.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action
is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security
alarm will turn the horn off after 29 seconds,
17
five seconds between cycles, up to eight
cycles if the trigger remains active and the
vehicle security alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the “OFF” mode.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless En-
try, make sure the vehicle’s keyless
ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone. Refer to "Doors" in "Getting To
Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry door handle to
unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "Getting
To Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder and the lift-
gate button on the key fob cannot arm or
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the
liftgate button will not disarm the vehicle
security alarm. If someone enters the ve-
hicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will
not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a
false alarm. If one of the previously described
arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm, regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will
sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle
security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
DOORS
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement
to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system
and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go — Pas-
sive Entry. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door
without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
18
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF;
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further in-
formation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response
time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds,
the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will
arm the security alarm.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected
by the vehicle passive entry system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob's wireless signal and pre-
vent the passive entry handle from locking/
unlocking the vehicle.
• Passive Entry activates illuminated ap-
proach for the time set by the customer (0,
30, 60, or 90 seconds), and flashes the
turn signal lights. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft
(1.5m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-
grammed, all doors will unlock when you grab
hold of the front driver’s door handle. To
select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor-
mation.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft
(1.5m) of the passenger door handle, grab
the front passenger door handle to unlock all
four doors and the liftgate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passen-
ger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“1st
Press of Key Fob Unlocks” or “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
19
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition is OFF.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
passive entry. There are three situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive
entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search
will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry
key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the
doors when any of the following conditions
are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the
door lock knobs.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close
the doors.
• If the liftgate is opened and then all 4 doors
are locked, the key fob will become locked
in the vehicle if the liftgate is closed and
will not alert the customer.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is
built into liftgate handle release. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5ft (1.5m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to
open with one fluid motion.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft
(1.5m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry
lock button located to the right of liftgate
handle release.
NOTE:
The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock
all doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock
feature is built into the electronic liftgate
release.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate
Passive Entry Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
20
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key
fob within 5ft (1.5m) of the driver or passen-
ger front door handles, push the Passive
Entry lock button located on the outside door
handle.
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing
the door handle lock button. This could un-
lock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock
or unlock the doors, using either Passive
Entry door handle. This is done to allow you
to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle without the vehicle react-
ing and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using the
Uconnect System, the key protection de-
scribed in "Preventing Inadvertent Locking
of Passive Entry key fob in Vehicle" remains
active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s inte-
rior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When
Locking
21
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Locking The Doors With One Or More
Doors Open
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
Auto Relocking
The auto door lock feature default condition
is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will
lock automatically when the vehicle's speed
exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door
lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer. The auto door lock
feature is enabled/disabled in the Uconnect
Settings.
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small chil-
dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door
Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in
the unlocked position.
SEATS
Memory Seat
The memory seat feature allows you to save
two different driver seating positions, driver's
outside mirror, and radio station preset set-
tings. The memory seat buttons are located
on the driver's door panel.
To set a memory position:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON
mode.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Memory Seat Buttons
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
22
2. Adjust all memory profile settings.
3. Push and release the S (set) button.
4. Push and release memory button (1) or (2)
within five seconds.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must
select the “Linking And Unlinking The Re-
mote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory”
feature through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner's Manual for further details.
To program a key fob to the memory position:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
position.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Push and release the S (set) button on the
memory switch, then within five seconds
push and release memory button (1) or (2)
accordingly.
4. Push and release the lock button on the
key fob within 10 seconds.
To recall the saved positions, push memory
button (1) or (2), or push unlock on the
programmed key fob.
Easy Entry/Exit Feature
The memory seat has an Easy Entry/Exit fea-
ture. This feature provides automatic driver
seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the fac-
tory. To enable (or later disable) this feature
you must select “Easy Exit Seats” in “Engine
Off Options” through the programmable fea-
tures in the Uconnect system.
For further details refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner's
Manual for further details.
Heated/Ventilated Seats
Front Heated Seats
If your vehicle is equipped with front heated
seats, the control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to
the control buttons through the climate
screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to
turn the HI setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a second
time to turn the LO setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a third
time to turn the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous op-
eration. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically
after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote
start, the heated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual for further details.
23
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in-
jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat
heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion. This may cause
the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased
surface temperature of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats
If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated
seats, the seat cushion and seat back will
have fans that draw the air from the passen-
ger compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at
two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through
the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once
to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a
second time to choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third
time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the venti-
lated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote
start, the ventilated seats can be pro-
grammed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual for further details.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the
risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. Head restraints
should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making
the rear of the head restraint face forward) in
an attempt to gain additional clearance to the
back of your head.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
24
Front Adjustment
The front driver and passenger seats are
equipped with Reactive Head Restraints
(RHR). In the event of a rear impact, the
RHRs will automatically extend forward mini-
mizing the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their
normal position following a rear impact. If the
RHRs do not return to their normal position,
see your authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push down-
ward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could cause se-
rious injury or death to occupants of the
vehicle. Always securely stow removed
WARNING!
head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the
Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats,
seat covers or portable DVD players.
These items may interfere with the op-
eration of the Reactive Head Restraint in
the event of a collision and could result
in serious injury or death.
Front Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as
it can go. Then, push the release button and
the adjustment button at the base of each
post while pulling the head restraint up. Seat-
back angle may need to be adjusted to fully
remove the head restraint. To reinstall the
Front Head Restraint
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
25
head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then,
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate
height.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats,
seat covers or portable DVD players.
These items may interfere with the op-
eration of the Active Head Restraint in
the event of a collision and could result
in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed
if they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci-
dental deployment of the Active Head
Restraint ensure that all cargo is se-
cured, as loose cargo could contact the
Active Head Restraint during sudden
WARNING!
stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Rear Adjustment
The rear outboard head restraints have three
positions up, mid and down. The center head
restraint has only two positions, up and down.
When the center seat is being occupied, the
head restraint should be in the raised posi-
tion. When there is no occupant in the center
seat, the head restraint can be lowered for
maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head re-
straint, push the adjustment button, located
at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Outboard Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
26
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in
its lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the outboard head restraints are in
WARNING!
their upright positions when the seat is to
be occupied.
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer
to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information.
Rear Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as
it can go. Then, push the release button and
the adjustment button at the base of each
post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push down-
ward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
STEERING WHEEL
Adjustment
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows
you to lengthen or shorten the steering col-
umn. The tilt/telescoping lever is located be-
low the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Center Head Restraint
1— Adjustment Button
2— Release Button
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
27
To unlock the steering column, push the
control handle downward (toward the floor).
To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward
as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the control handle upward
until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column
while driving or driving with the steering
column unlocked, could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel
If your vehicle is equipped with a heated
steering wheel, it contains a heating element
that will keep your hands warm in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only
one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it can
operate for an average of 80 minutes or more
before automatically shutting off. This time
may vary depending on environmental tem-
peratures. The heated steering wheel can
shut off early or may not turn on when the
steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time to turn the heating element
off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles With Remote Start — If Equipped
On models that are equipped with remote
start, the heated steering wheel can be pro-
grammed to come on during a remote start
through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-
cation, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low tempera-
tures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or steering wheel covers of
any type and material. This may cause
the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped, the switch for the power folding
mirrors is located between the power mirror
switches L (left) and R (right). Push the
switch once and the mirrors will fold in.
Pushing the switch a second time will return
the mirrors to the normal driving position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
28
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the folding feature will be dis-
abled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and
the vehicle speed is equal or greater than
10 mph (16 km/h), they will automatically
unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and
unfold them by pushing the button (this may
require multiple button pushes). This resets
them to their normal position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt
frost or ice. This feature will be ac-
tivated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster. Refer to “Climate Con-
trols” in this chapter for further information.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
Headlights
The headlight switch is located on the instru-
ment panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Rotate the headlight switch to the first detent
for parking lights and to the second
detent
for headlights.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on
when the engine is started and remain on
unless the headlamps are turned on, the
parking brake is applied, or the engine is shut
off.
NOTE:
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information.
High Beams
Push the multifunction lever toward the in-
strument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction back
toward the steering wheel will turn the low
beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight
2 — Push Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
29
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunc-
tion lever toward you. This will cause the
headlights to turn on at high beam and re-
main on until the lever is released.
Automatic Lighting
The Automatic High Beams system provides
increased forward lighting at night by auto-
mating high beam control through the use of
a digital camera mounted above the inside
rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view. This fea-
ture is activated by selecting “ON” under
“Auto High Beam” within your Uconnect set-
tings, as well as turning the headlight switch
to the AUTO position. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information.
NOTE:
There is not an adjustable sensitivity level for
this feature.
The headlight switch is located on the instru-
ment panel to the left of the steering wheel.
When set to AUTO, the system automatically
turns the headlights on or off based on am-
bient light levels.
Parking Lights
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
first detent for parking light and instrument
panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Headlight Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds (program-
mable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlit
area.
To activate the delay feature, place the igni-
tion in the OFF position while the headlights
are still on. Then, turn off the headlights
within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on,
or place the ignition in ACC or RUN, the
system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the
ignition, they will turn off in the normal
manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within
45 seconds of placing the ignition in the
OFF position to activate this feature.
• The headlight delay time is programmable
using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner’s Manual for further information.
Front Fog Lights
The front fog light switch is built into the
headlight switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the headlight switch. To turn off the
front fog lights, either push the headlight
switch a second time or turn off the headlight
switch.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
30
An indicator light in the instrument cluster
display illuminates when the fog lights are
turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, se-
lecting the high beam headlights will turn off
the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display flash to show proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not
flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb. If an
indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator
bulb is defective.
•
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and
a turn signal is activated, the Daytime Run-
ning Lamp will turn off on the side of the
vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing.
The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without mov-
ing beyond the detent, and the turn signal
(right or left) will flash three times. Then,
automatically turn off.
WIPER AND WASHERS
Front Wipers
The windshield wiper/washer controls are lo-
cated on the multifunction lever on the right
side of the steering column. The front wipers
Multifunction Lever
1 — Push For Rear Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper
31
are operated by rotating a switch, located on
the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Wiper” in
this section.
Front Wiper Operation
Intermittent, Low And High Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first
four detent positions for intermittent set-
tings, the fifth detent for low wiper operation
and the sixth detent for high wiper operation.
Washer Operation
Pull the lever rearward toward you and hold
for as long as spray is desired.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the Mist position
and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be
sprayed on the windshield. The wash func-
tion must be activated in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers
This feature senses moisture on the vehicle's
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers for the driver when the switch is in the
intermittent position. The feature is espe-
cially useful for road splash or overspray from
the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to
one of four settings to activate this feature.
Automatic Wiping
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay po-
sition one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay position four is the most sensitive.
Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used
if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity.
Setting four can be used if the driver desires
more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner's Manual for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection fea-
tures for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the automatic trans-
mission is in the NEUTRAL position, the
Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
32
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit condi-
tions (mentioned previously) exist.
Rear Wiper
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the windshield wiper/washer lever on the
right side of the steering column. The rear
wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper Operation
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the first detent for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation.
Rear Washer Operation
Push the lever forward and hold while spray is
desired. Once the switch is released, it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will
cycle several times before returning to the
parked position.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
CAUTION!
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments,
or abrasive window cleaners on the inte-
rior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
33
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Climate Controls With A Touchscreen Overview
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display With Automatic Temperature Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
34
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV With 8.4–inch Display With Automatic Temperature Controls
35
Automatic Temperature Faceplate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
36
Climate Control With A Touchscreen Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode.
NOTE:
• Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recir-
culation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this
function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Opera-
tion” within this section for more information.
37
Icon Description
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side win-
dow demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi-
mum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front de-
frost mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touch-
screen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will only appear if the system is equipped with an automatic climate con-
trol system.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
38
Icon Description
SYNC Button — If Equipped
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature set-
ting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
•
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from
the floor outlets.
39
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister out-
lets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy con-
ditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture
on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate
the air conditioning system. When the air
conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu-
midified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press
the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning
and manually adjust the blower and airflow
mode settings. Also, make sure to select only
Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and in-
crease blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the ra-
diator), for an accumulation of dirt or in-
sects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cool-
ing performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
40
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode posi-
tion can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX
A/C operation to switch to the selected set-
ting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button.
The Recirculation indicator will illuminate
when this button is selected. Press the button
a second time to turn off the Recirculation
mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE:
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate,
or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on
the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting
the driver and passenger temperature
control buttons. Once the desired tem-
perature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that
comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system
to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S.
or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of
manual override features. The AUTO symbol
in the front ATC display will be turned off
when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to pro-
vide proper corrosion protection and to pro-
tect against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
41
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and de-
froster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and
the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recircula-
tion mode during Winter months is not rec-
ommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for
about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure ad-
equate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of
the rear window. Do not use abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel
to the heating elements. Labels can be
peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instru-
ments, or abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from
the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
tions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the
air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust
and pollen from the air. Contact an autho-
rized dealer to service your cabin air filter,
and to have it replaced when needed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
42
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver's door
control all the door windows.
There are single window controls on each
passenger door trim panel, which operate the
passenger door windows. The window con-
trols will operate only when the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a ve-
hicle, and do not let children play with
power windows. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, or in a location acces-
sible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
dren, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle
and use the window switch again to close
the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions
may trigger the auto-reverse function unex-
pectedly during auto-closure. If this hap-
pens, pull the switch lightly and hold to
close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window
path before closing.
Power Window Switches
1 — Front Power Window Switches
2 — Rear Power Window Switches
43
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two sec-
onds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to
open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional
two seconds after the window is fully
open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's
door trim panel allows you to disable the
window controls on the rear passenger doors.
To disable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button (the indi-
cator light on the button with turn on). To
enable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button again (the indica-
tor light on the button will turn back off).
POWER SUNROOF
The power sunroof switches are located on
the overhead console.
Power Window Lockout Button
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Opening Sunroof
4 — Opening Power Shade
5 — Closing Power Shade
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
44
Opening
Opening Sunroof — Express
• Push the sunroof switch rearward and re-
lease it within one-half second. The sunroof
will automatically open to the halfway po-
sition and stop automatically.
• Push the sunroof switch a second time from
the halfway position and the sunroof will
automatically open to the full open position
and stop automatically.
Opening Sunroof — Manual
• Push and hold the sunroof switch rearward.
The sunroof will open and stop automati-
cally at the half-open position.
• Push and hold the sunroof switch rearward
again and the sunroof will open automati-
cally to the full-open position.
NOTE:
Any release of the sunroof switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof
switch is pushed and held rearward again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the button and the sunroof
will open to the vent position.
This is called “Express Vent” and will occur
regardless of sunroof position. During Ex-
press Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the sunroof switch forward and release
it within one-half second. The sunroof will
close automatically from any position.
Closing Sunroof — Manual
To close the sunroof, push and hold the
sunroof switch in the forward position.
NOTE:
Any release of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain
in a partially closed condition until the switch
is pushed and held forward again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as a
helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffet-
ing occurs with the rear windows open, adjust
the front and rear windows together.
If buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening, or adjust any
window. This will minimize buffeting.
Power Sun Shade
Express Open
Push the shade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second and the shade will
automatically open to the halfway position
and stop automatically.
Push the switch a second time from the
halfway position and the shade will automati-
cally open to the full open position and stop
automatically.
Manual Open
To open the shade, push and hold the switch
rearward. The shade will open and stop auto-
matically at the half-open position.
45
Push and hold the shade switch rearward
again and the shade will open automatically
to the full-open position.
Express Close
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will close
automatically from any position.
Manual Close
To close the shade, push and hold the switch
in the forward position.
Pinch Protection Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will auto-
matically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs. Next, push the switch forward
and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth
close attempt will be a Manual Close move-
ment with Pinch Protect disabled.
WARNING!
• Do not let children play with the sunroof.
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of
being thrown from a vehicle with an
open sunroof. You could also be severely
injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured.
WARNING!
• Do not allow small children to operate
the sunroof. Never allow your fingers,
other body parts, or any object to project
through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft
cloth to clean the glass panel.
HOOD
Opening The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the
hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
46
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull
the safety latch release lever forward (to-
ward you). The safety latch release lever is
located behind the front edge of the hood,
slightly off-center to the right.
Closing The Hood
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is
in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam
the hood to close it. Lower hood to approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the
hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive ve-
hicle unless hood is fully closed, with both
latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Key-
less Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle”) or by push-
ing the liftgate button on the key fob. Push
the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to open the power liftgate. Once
the liftgate is open, pushing the button twice
within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or
closed by pushing the liftgate button located
on the front overhead console. If the liftgate
is fully open, the liftgate can be closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the left
rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If
the liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgate
button located on the left rear trim panel will
reverse the liftgate.
Safety Latch Location
47
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is
built into the electronic liftgate release. With
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Push the button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to release the liftgate.
Closing
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle
when the liftgate takes over the closing effort.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button lo-
cated to the left of the outside handle release
will lock the vehicle.
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing
the button, located in the upper left trim in
the liftgate opening. Pushing button will only
close the liftgate. This button cannot be used
to open the liftgate.
NOTE:
The liftgate unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER (HOMELINK)
Liftgate Entry
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
48
• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles
12 Volt battery.
• The HomeLink buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink channels.
• To operate HomeLink, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink button.
• The HomeLink indicator light is located
above the center button.
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink
For efficient programming and accurate trans-
mission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is pro-
grammed to activate the device you are trying
to program your HomeLink button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink before you use it
for the first time.
If you have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for in-
formation or assistance.
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink indicator light
flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be per-
formed when programming HomeLink for the
first time. Do not erase channels when pro-
gramming additional buttons.
HomeLink Buttons And Indicator Light
49
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code,
a good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after
1995 have rolling codes. A device with a
rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button located where the antenna is
attached to the device. The button may not
be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may
vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the
button you normally use to operate the de-
vice.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will
also not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener
To program any of the HomeLink buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, fol-
low the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional but-
tons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and ob-
serve the HomeLink indicator light. The
HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens, re-
lease both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling
code/non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate
rolling code final step 2, after completing
rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener motor. Firmly push
and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
50
2. Return to the vehicle and push the pro-
grammed HomeLink button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink button and observe the
HomeLink indicator light. If the
HomeLink indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open
and close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program
the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate.
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed ga-
rage or confined area while program-
ming the transceiver. Exhaust gas from
your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide
(CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when in-
haled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
Programming HomeLink To A
Miscellaneous Device
Refer to “Programming HomeLink To A Ga-
rage Door Opener” for the procedure on how
to program HomeLink to a miscellaneous
device, as it follows the same procedure. Be
sure to determine if the device has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code before beginning
the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after sev-
eral seconds of transmission, which may not
be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
The procedure may need to be preformed
multiple times to successfully pair the device
to your HomeLink buttons.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink
Button
To reprogram a single HomeLink button that
has been previously trained, without erasing
all the channels, follow the procedure below.
Be sure to determine whether the new device
you want to program the HomeLink button to
has a Rolling Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink but-
ton until the HomeLink Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
51
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all re-
maining steps.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Power Outlets
There are three 12 Volt electrical power out-
lets on this vehicle.
The front 12 Volt power outlet is located
below the climate controls in the Media Cen-
ter, and is powered when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN position. The outlet can
operate a conventional cigar lighter unit or
power accessories designed for use with a
standard power outlet adapter.
The center console 12 Volt power outlet is
powered directly from the battery (power
available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
Front Power Outlet
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
52
There is also a 12 Volt power outlet located in
the rear cargo area of the vehicle. This power
outlet has power available directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items
plugged into this outlet also may discharge
the battery and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex-
ceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
• The rear cargo power outlet can be switched
to “battery” powered all the time by switch-
ing the power outlet right rear quarter panel
fuse in the fuse panel.
Center Console Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
53
Power Outlets Fuse Locations
1 — F75 Fuse 20A Yellow Front Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter Console Bin
2 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery powered at all times)
3 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position)
4 — F60 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
54
Power Inverter
A 115 or 230 Volt, 150 Watt power inverter
outlet is located on the rear of the center
console. This outlet can power cellular
phones, electronics and other low power de-
vices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
will automatically shut down. Once the elec-
trical device has been removed from the out-
let, the inverter should automatically reset.
If the power rating exceeds approximately
170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be
reset manually. To reset the inverter manu-
ally, unplug the device and plug it in again. To
avoid overloading the circuit, check the
power ratings on electrical devices prior to
using the inverter.
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death DO NOT:
• insert any objects into the receptacles
• touch with wet hands
Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet
is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter
55
56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY...................58
Instrument Cluster Display Controls ....58
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items ......................59
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES.................59
Red Warning Lights..............59
Yellow Warning Lights ............62
Yellow Indicator Lights ............66
Green Indicator Lights ............66
White Indicator Lights ............67
Blue Indicator Lights .............68
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM—OBDII ............68
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .................69
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
57
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru-
ment cluster display, which offers useful in-
formation to the driver. With the ignition in
the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles, or kilometers, in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information
about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on
the instrument panel, your instrument clus-
ter display can show you how systems are
working and give you warnings when they
aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through and enter the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make se-
lections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. Pushing the instrument
cluster display controls on the left side of the
steering wheel allows the driver to select
vehicle information and Personal Settings.
• Push the up button to scroll upward through
the main menus (Speedometer, Vehicle
Info, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip, Au-
dio, Messages, Screen Set Up).
• Push the down arrow button to scroll down-
ward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver
Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Mes-
sages, Screen Set Up).
• Push the right arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item.
• Push the left arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item.
• Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item. Push and hold the OK
arrow button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be
reset.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
58
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the following main menu items:
Speedometer Stop/Start
Vehicle Info Audio
Driver Assist Messages
Fuel Economy Screen Setup
Trip
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary. Refer to the “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedi-
cated message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read care-
fully in all cases. Always refer to the informa-
tion in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first
if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment op-
tions and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This light indicates when the driver or pas-
senger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuck-
led, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or
remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” in “Safety” for further information.
— Air Bag Warning Light
This light indicates a fault with the air bag,
and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light
will illuminate with a single chime when a
fault with the air bag has been detected, it
will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the
light is either not on during startup, stays on,
or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there
is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking
brake has been disengaged, and the fluid
level is at the full mark on the master cylinder
reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hy-
draulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condi-
59
tion has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake, and a brake
pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in
either half of the dual brake system is indi-
cated by the Brake Warning Light, which will
turn on when the brake fluid level in the
master cylinder has dropped below a speci-
fied level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid
level conditions. The vehicle should have
service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair
is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light
on is dangerous. Part of the brake system
may have failed. It will take longer to stop
the vehicle. You could have a collision.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the
event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is re-
quired.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from
the OFF position to the ON/RUN position.
The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake
fault is detected. If the light does not illumi-
nate, have the light inspected by your autho-
rized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
60
— Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with strenuous
usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or slightly faster, with the transmission in
PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off.
Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning
Light is illuminated you could cause the
fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated
will eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warn-
ing Light
This light warns of an overheated engine
condition. If the engine coolant temperature
is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to nor-
mal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Over-
heats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature
is high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the
engine is running, there may be a malfunc-
tion with the charging system. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is run-
ning, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely
and completely stopped and the transmission
is placed in the PARK position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains on with
the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually
be drivable; however, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
61
If the light continues to flash when the ve-
hicle is running, immediate service is re-
quired and you may experience reduced per-
formance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing.
The light will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If
the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
— Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light
This light will turn on when there's a fault
with the EPS (Electric Power Steering) sys-
tem. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting
And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is
open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood
is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indica-
tor Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine
and automatic transmission control systems.
The light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start.
If the bulb does not come on when turning
the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN,
have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illumi-
nate the light after engine start. The vehicle
should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and
will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may
flash to alert serious conditions that could
lead to immediate loss of power or severe
catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this
occurs.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
62
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher tem-
peratures than in normal operating condi-
tions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause dam-
age to the vehicle control system. It also
could affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon
occur. Immediate service is required.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Active Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will indicate when the Electronic
Stability Control system is Active. The “ESC
Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will
come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when
ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine run-
ning, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the
“ESC Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or click-
ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is
in an ESC event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
— Electronic Park Brake Warning
Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Elec-
tronic Park Brake is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an autho-
rized dealer.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message
is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel con-
sumption may not be guaranteed.
63
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in
sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compro-
mised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp
braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedi-
cated tire repair kit and contact your au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
minates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This se-
quence will continue upon subsequent ve-
hicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the ve-
hicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc-
tion telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
64
CAUTION!
of the same size, type, and/or style. After-
market wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af-
ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning
Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warn-
ing Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system in-
spected by an authorized dealer.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and
remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low
Fuel Warning.
— Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/
Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required. Contact your authorized
dealer for service.
— Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in
the Forward Collision Warning System. Con-
tact your local authorized dealer for service.
Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in
"Safety" for further information.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the wind-
shield washer fluid is low.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in
the ACC system. Contact your local autho-
rized dealer for service. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”
in “Starting And Operating.”
SER
V
4WD
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If
Equipped
If the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is re-
quired. We recommend you drive to the near-
est service center and have the vehicle ser-
viced immediately.
65
— LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid
yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane
marker. The warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
— Service LaneSense Warning Light
— If Equipped
This light will turn on when the LaneSense
system is not operating and needs service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
— Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the fuel filler
cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to
disengage the light. If the light does not turn
off, please see an authorized dealer.
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates that Forward Collision
Warning is off.
— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides
a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in-
creased torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information on four-wheel drive op-
eration and proper use.
— NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL mode
and the front and rear driveshafts are disen-
gaged from the powertrain.
— Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle lock
has been activated.
Green Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
With Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a
target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
Without Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display the distance setting for the
ACC system when the system is engaged.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
66
eco
— ECO Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when ECO Mode is
active.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will turn on when the speed control
is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for fur-
ther information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” and ready to provide
visual and torque warnings if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs. Refer to “Lane-
Sense — If Equipped" in “Starting And Op-
erating” for further information.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/
Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn
signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the ve-
hicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb
if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) has been turned on, but is not
set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”
in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
has reached the speed desired and the set
button has been selected. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
— Selec Speed Control Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec Speed
Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure the
vehicle is Four Wheel Drive Low (4WD) and
push the button on the Instrument Panel.
67
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear
in the instrument cluster display.
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
Light
This light will turn on when the speed control
has been turned on, but not set. Refer to
“Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent
Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp
will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case is in the
“4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed
is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to
use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light
will flash on/off.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
armed, the LaneSense indicator is solid
white. This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a
single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams acti-
vated, push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the
high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rear-
ward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off,
pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current govern-
ment regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diag-
nostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
68
CAUTION!
economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter dam-
age and power loss will soon occur. Im-
mediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to diagnose or
service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected
to the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
WARNING!
• Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of ve-
hicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving seri-
ous injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access,
information stored in your vehicle
systems, including personal infor-
mation.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecu-
rity” in “Multimedia”.
69
70
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...........72
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ......72
Electronic Brake Control System .....73
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .83
Blind Spot Monitoring ............83
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .....85
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .87
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS ..................91
Occupant Restraint Systems Features . .91
Important Safety Precautions .......91
Seat Belt Systems ..............92
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS). .99
Child Restraints ...............114
Transporting Pets ..............126
SAFETY TIPS ..............126
Transporting Passengers ..........126
Exhaust Gas .................127
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle .................127
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle .........129
SAFETY
71
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake perfor-
mance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to en-
sure that the ABS is working properly each
time the vehicle is started and driven. During
this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking
sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow,
gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of
ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to
run for a short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated elec-
tronic equipment that may be suscep-
tible to interference caused by improp-
erly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such
equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may
lead to a collision. Pumping makes the
stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the
WARNING!
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM
tires. Modification may result in degraded
ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
will turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” re-
mains on or comes on while driving, it indi-
cates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is
SAFETY
72
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if
the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on,
the brake system should be serviced as soon
as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is
turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This
system includes Electronic Brake Force Dis-
tribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Elec-
tronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems
work together to enhance both vehicle stabil-
ity and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Brak-
ing (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Dy-
namic Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent
Control (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control
(SSC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear
axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear
axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the
rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS be-
fore the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the brake system is not functioning properly
and that immediate service is required. If the
“Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emer-
gency braking situation by sensing the rate
and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the anti-lock brake system
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly re-
sults in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stop-
ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
73
WARNING!
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll
back from a complete stop while on an in-
cline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If
the driver does not apply the throttle before
this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down
the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in
order for HSA to activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle up-
hill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate
if the transmission is in PARK or NEU-
TRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill
Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and
slight rolling may occur, such as on minor
hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake op-
eration to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
WARNING!
complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off.
To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument
cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument
cluster display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
SAFETY
74
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more
than one-half turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the
lower switch bank below the climate con-
trol four times within 20 seconds. The
“ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center
and then an additional slightly more than
one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and
then back to ON. If the sequence was
completed properly, the “ESC Off Indica-
tor Light” will blink several times to con-
firm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return
this feature to its previous setting.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate
roll back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with
your trailer, the trailer brakes may be
activated and deactivated with the brake
switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid roll-
ing down an incline while resuming ac-
celeration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pres-
sure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the
transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can re-
sult in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel
spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel
spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake
pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or re-
duce engine power to provide enhanced ac-
celeration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions
similar to a limited slip differential and con-
trols the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow
more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain en-
abled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced
mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
75
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning
more than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning
less than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will
start to flash as soon as the ESC system
becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” be-
gins to flash during acceleration, ease up on
the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) can-
not prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
WARNING!
increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC also cannot prevent accidents re-
sulting from loss of vehicle control due
to inappropriate driver input for the con-
ditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skill-
ful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to prop-
erly maintain your vehicle, may change
the handling characteristics of your ve-
hicle, and may negatively affect the per-
formance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, brak-
ing system, tire type and size or wheel
size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC
WARNING!
performance. Any vehicle modification
or poor vehicle maintenance that re-
duces the effectiveness of the ESC sys-
tem can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, per-
sonal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of opera-
tion, the ESC system may have multiple op-
erating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the
ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the
ESC system will be in this mode. This mode
should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
SAFETY
76
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for
more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the
ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes
a momentary button push will toggle the ESC
mode. Multiple momentary button pushed
may be required to return to ESC On.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, (except for the lim-
ited slip feature described in the TCS
WARNING!
section), has been disabled and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illumi-
nated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle sta-
bility offered by the ESC system is re-
duced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on
any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and
ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC
Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle
is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
“ESC OFF” message will display in the in-
strument cluster. To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle
speed slows below the predetermined speed
the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes if so equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features
are disabled. Therefore, enhanced ve-
hicle stability offered by the ESC system
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not en-
gage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the en-
hanced vehicle stability offered by ESC
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not en-
gage to assist in maintaining stability.
77
WARNING!
ESC “Full Off” mode is only intended for
off-highway or off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the
ignition is turned to the ON mode.
It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster)
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose trac-
tion and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration,
ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the igni-
tion is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or click-
ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indi-
cates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering
wheel input and the speed of the vehicle.
When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehi-
cle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause
wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due
to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
SAFETY
78
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full
Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a
complete explanation of the available ESC
modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading,
road conditions and driving conditions,
influence the chance that wheel lift or
rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all
wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles. The capabilities
of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take
the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the
sway. TSC will become active automatically
once an excessively swaying trailer is recog-
nized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and
you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full
Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the
vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe
location, and adjust the trailer load to
eliminate trailer sway.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emer-
gency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will periodi-
cally apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the wind-
shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When
Rain Brake Support is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver inter-
action is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the
ESC and Electric Power Steering (EPS) mod-
ules that provides torque at the steering
wheel for certain driving conditions in which
the ESC module is detecting vehicle instabil-
ity. The torque that the steering wheel re-
79
ceives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/
maintain vehicle stability. The only notifica-
tion the driver receives that the feature is
active is the torque applied to the steering
wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the
driver realize the correct course of action
through small torques on the steering wheel,
which means the effectiveness of the DST
feature is highly dependent on the driver’s
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied
torque. It is very important to realize that this
feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning
the driver is still responsible for steering the
vehicle.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driv-
ing while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains
vehicle speed while descending hills during
various driving situations. HDC controls ve-
hicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or
driver is actively overriding with brake or
throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch,
but the following conditions must also be met
to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate auto-
matically if driven down a grade of sufficient
magnitude. The set speed for HDC is select-
able by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following sum-
marizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate.
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
SAFETY
80
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for
HDC target speed selection, but will not af-
fect the gear chosen by the transmission.
When actively controlling HDC the transmis-
sion will shift appropriately for the driver-
selected set speed and corresponding driving
conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available
if any of the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insuffi-
cient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on
an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any
of the following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and
the HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is
in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu-
minate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal
operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when
the driver pushes the HDC switch but en-
able conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when
HDC disables due to excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descend-
ing hills. The driver must remain attentive
to the driving conditions and is responsible
for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD
Low Range only. SSC maintains vehicle
speed by actively controlling engine torque
and brakes.
81
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or
driver is actively overriding with brake or
throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch,
but the following conditions must also be met
to enable SSC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
• Driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automati-
cally once the following conditions are met:
• Driver releases throttle.
• Driver releases brake.
•
Transmission is in any selection other than P.
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the
driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear
shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may
be reduced when climbing a grade and the
level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summa-
rizes the SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not
active
NOTE:
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for
SSC target speed selection but will not
affect the gear chosen by the transmission.
While actively controlling SSC the trans-
mission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and correspond-
ing driving conditions.
• SSC performance is influenced by the Ter-
rain Select mode. This difference may be
notable to the driver and may be perceived
as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available
if any of the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
SAFETY
82
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the SSC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and
the SSC switch has an LED which offer feed-
back to the driver about the state SSC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu-
minate and remain on solid when SSC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal
operating condition for SSC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when
the driver pushes the SSC switch but en-
able conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
for several seconds then extinguish when
SSC disables due to excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
then extinguish when SSC deactivates due
to overheated brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when driving in
off road conditions. The driver must re-
main attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe
vehicle speed.
AUXILIARY DRIVING
SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
uses two radar-based sensors, located inside
the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, mo-
torcycles etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
The BSM detection zone covers approxi-
mately one lane width on both sides of the
vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts
at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
83
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both out-
side rear view mirrors to let the driver know
that the system is operational. The BSM
system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters
stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM warning light, located in the out-
side mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle
moves into a blind spot zone.
The BSM system can also be configured to
sound an audible (chime) alert and mute the
radio to notify you of objects that have en-
tered the detection zones.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is in-
tended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where the vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP
system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is de-
tected, will alert the driver. When RCP is on
and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is
alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring” in “Safety”
in the Owner's Manual for further informa-
tion.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner's Manual for further details.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a de-
tected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is pres-
ent. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
Rear Detection Zones
BSM Warning Light
SAFETY
84
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal
is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an
audible chime will also be sounded. When-
ever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time,
both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert, the
radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will
be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current oper-
ating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started the previously
stored mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
provides the driver with audible and visual
warnings within the instrument cluster dis-
play to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings are
intended to provide the driver with enough
time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential
collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the for-
ward looking sensors, as well as the Elec-
tronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate
the probability of a forward collision. When
the system determines that a forward colli-
sion is probable, the driver will be provided
with audible and visual warnings.
85
Turning FCW On Or Off
The forward collision button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
• To turn the FCW system off, push the for-
ward collision button once to turn the sys-
tem OFF.
• To turn the FCW system back on, push the
forward collision button again to turn the
system on.
NOTE:
• The default status of FCW is “on”, this
allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents
the system from warning you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you. If
FCW is set to off, “FCW OFF” will appear in
the instrument cluster display.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature has two settings and can be
changed within the Uconnect System
Screen:
• Far
• Near
Far
The far setting provides warnings for poten-
tial collisions more distant in front of the
vehicle, allowing the driver to have the most
reaction time to avoid a collision.
More cautious drivers that do not mind fre-
quent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
This setting gives you the most reaction time.
Near
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” set-
ting, allows the system to warn you of a
potential frontal collision when you are much
closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than
the “Far” setting, which allows for a more
dynamic driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want
to avoid frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
NOTE:
Changing the Active Braking status to off
prevents the system from providing autono-
mous braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision. Active
braking can be turned off in the Uconnect
controls settings.
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further
information.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own,
nor can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility
to avoid a collision by controlling the ve-
hicle via braking and steering. Failure to
follow this warning could lead to serious
injury or death.
SAFETY
86
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold
placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature
by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is
normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natu-
ral pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition
exists, and will not turn off until the tire
pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pres-
sure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off once the system receives the updated
tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa).
If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)
87
will decrease the tire pressure to approxi-
mately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the ve-
hicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when
CAUTION!
using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. The
TPM sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels, and may contribute
to a poor overall system performance.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM
wheels to assure TPMS feature opera-
tion.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to
have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt
from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace nor-
mal tire care and maintenance, or to pro-
vide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s respon-
sibility to maintain correct tire pressure
using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even
if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor
the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
SAFETY
88
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check
the tire pressure in all of the tires on your
vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper
pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
• Tire pressure monitoring telltale light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-
ings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will illuminate in
the instrument cluster and a
chime will sound when tire pres-
sure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instru-
ment cluster will display a "Tire Low" message
for a minimum of five seconds, an "Inflate to
XX" message and a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pres-
sure (those in a different color in the instru-
ment cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value as
shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once
the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update,
the pressure values in the graphic display in
the instrument cluster will return to their
original color, and the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light” will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" mes-
sage for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warning
89
exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any
of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driv-
ing next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the com-
pact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-
matching full size spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will remain on and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a dif-
ferent color pressure value and an "Inflate
to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will dis-
play a “Service Tire Pressure System”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid, and the instru-
ment cluster will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the compact spare or non-
matching full size, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will dis-
play a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires)
with wheel and tire assemblies that do not
have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing
winter wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Moni-
toring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle
SAFETY
90
for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light"
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on. The instrument cluster will dis-
play the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the
TPMS will no longer chime or display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the
instrument cluster but dashes (- -) will re-
main in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
"TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will no longer be displayed as long
as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information
in this section. It tells you how to use your
restraint system properly, to keep you and
your passengers as safe as possible.
91
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying
air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in
the front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible and use the proper
child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”
in this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear
the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to
“Child Restraints” in this section for fur-
ther information) should be secured in a
vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints
or belt-positioning booster seats. Older
children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats
should be moved back as far as practical
to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs
to be modified to accommodate a dis-
abled person, refer to the “Customer As-
sistance” section for customer service
contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
WARNING!
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and could cause a
collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save
lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of
injuries in a collision. Some of the worst
injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by
striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in
a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
SAFETY
92
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
Belt Alert feature is active whenever the igni-
tion switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi-
tion.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-
tion, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-
tion the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on
and remain on until both outboard front seat
belts are buckled. The outboard front passen-
ger seat BeltAlert is not active when an out-
board front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or out-
board front seat passenger is unbuckled (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking
the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding
an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the
seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed
until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The
driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while
the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert
is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be
triggered when an animal or other items are
placed on the outboard front passenger seat
or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It
is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
seat belts are buckled.
93
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat
belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers
can suffer much greater injuries if you
are not properly buckled up. You can
strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of
WARNING!
the vehicle. Always be sure you and
others in your vehicle are buckled up
properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly. Oc-
cupants, including the driver, should al-
ways wear their seat belts whether or not
an air bag is also provided at their seat-
ing position to minimize the risk of se-
vere injury or death in the event of a
crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
WARNING!
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and
pelvic bones, but across your abdomen.
Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut
into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat
against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your ve-
hicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
SAFETY
94
WARNING!
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The
lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not
protect you properly. In a sudden stop,
you could move too far forward, increas-
ing the possibility of injury. Wear your
seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli-
sion, increasing head and neck injury. A
seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will
not protect you from injury during a
collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear
WARNING!
your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder
belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart
in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble
or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in
the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a
rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Buckle
2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
95
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your ab-
domen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a
twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as pos-
sible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)
above the latch plate, grasp and twist the
seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the
latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the
folded webbing. The folded webbing must
enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat
belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt
away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2 — Insert the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a “click.”
Adjustable Anchorage
SAFETY
96
As a guide, if you are shorter than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in
a lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it
up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor-
age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchor-
age until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
WARNING!
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt in a crash.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should
be used only if the existing seat belt is not
long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is
not required for a different occupant, it must
be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is
physically required in order to properly
fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT
USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front
edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle
and the center of the occupant’s body is
LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use
the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt
is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Re-
move and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
97
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury
in the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the
arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event
of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The
seat belt still must be worn snugly and posi-
tioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with
an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used
to secure a child restraint system. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” un-
der the “Child Restraints” section of this
manual. The figure below illustrates the lock-
ing feature for each seating position.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
SAFETY
98
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal
usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far
enough to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section so as to not activate the
ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case
and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder
belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat
belt will still retract to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in
a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under
should always be properly restrained in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now
in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced
if the switchable Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat
belt function is not working properly
when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode
to restrain occupants who are wearing
the seat belt or children who are using
booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a har-
ness for restraining the child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
99
The air bag system must be ready to protect
you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal cir-
cuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system when-
ever the ignition switch is in the START or
ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system
even if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel for approximately
four to eight seconds for a self-check when
the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag
Warning Light if a malfunction is detected
that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on during the four to eight seconds when
the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-
mittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en-
gine related gauges are not working, the Oc-
cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also
be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
SAFETY
100
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t
have the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if
it comes on as you drive, have an autho-
rized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will stay on until the fault is
cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” section of
this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/
shoulder belts for both the driver and front
passenger. The front air bags are a supple-
ment to the seat belt restraint systems. The
driver front air bag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver/Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag/Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster
101
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has mul-
tistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to
the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or
other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immedi-
ately during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in
less severe collisions. A higher energy output
is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle
switch that detects whether the driver or front
passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver
and/or front passenger seat track position
sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat
position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) that is designed to provide Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropri-
ate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags
and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The
protective covers for the air bag cush-
ions are designed to open only when the
air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
SAFETY
102
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to
reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type
and location of impact, front air bags may
deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end
damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle de-
celeration over time, vehicle speed and dam-
age by themselves are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have de-
ployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help
keep you in position, away from an inflating
air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air
bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The front air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated
safety system for this vehicle. It is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated
weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
is located underneath the front passenger
seat. The Sensor is located beneath the pas-
senger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the
seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the
front passenger’s most probable classifica-
tion. The OCM communicates this informa-
tion to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate
as designed, it is important for the front
passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt.
103
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS esti-
mates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects on it; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint; or
• The front passenger is not properly seated
or his or her weight is taken off of the seat
for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Rear-facing child re-
straint
Reduced-power de-
ployment
Child, including a
child in a forward-
facing child restraint
or booster seat*
Reduced-power de-
ployment OR Full-
power deployment
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Properly seated adult Full-power deploy-
ment OR reduced-
power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power de-
ployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as
an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never
allow children to ride in the front passenger
seat and never install a child restraint sys-
tem, including a rear-facing child restraint, in
the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Children 12 years or younger should
always ride buckled up in a vehicle with
a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s
most probable classification. The OCS esti-
mates the seated weight on the front passen-
ger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status
to the ORC. The ORC uses the classification
to determine whether the Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it
is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat
belt. Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their
feet comfortably on or near the floor
SAFETY
104
• Sitting with their back against the seatback
and the seatback in an upright position
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the front passenger
seat, the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This
does not mean that the OCS is working im-
properly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passen-
ger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger
seat. Failure to do so may result in serious
injury or death. The OCS determines the most
probable classification of the occupant that it
detects. The OCS will detect the front passen-
ger’s decreased or increased seated weight,
which may result in an adjusted inflation rate
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is
working improperly. Decreasing the front pas-
senger’s seated weight on the front passenger
seat may result in a reduced-power deploy-
ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result
in a full-power deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seat-
ing include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred
to another part of the vehicle (like the door,
arm rest or instrument panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, side-
ways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an
object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passen-
ger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front pas-
senger seat and center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are at-
tached to the front passenger seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
Seated Properly
105
The OCS determines the front passenger’s
most probable classification. If an occupant
in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, for
example:
WARNING!
• If a child restraint system, child, small
teenager or adult in the front passenger
seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS
that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a
collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit prop-
erly, with the seatback in an upright
position, your back against the seat-
back, sitting upright, facing forward, in
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
SAFETY
106
WARNING!
the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g.,
backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in
the front passenger seat. Holding an
object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occu-
pant’s properly seated weight input,
which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the
OCS from working properly, which may
result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instru-
ment panel will turn on whenever the OCS is
unable to classify the front passenger seat
status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect
the operation of the air bag system. If the Air
Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains criti-
cal OCS components that may affect the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation.
In order for the OCS to properly classify the
seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.
Do not make any modifications to the front
passenger seat components, assembly, or to
the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or
cushion needs service for any reason, take
the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may
be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA
US LLC for the specific model being re-
paired. Always use the correct seat cover
and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion
with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any Supplemental Re-
straint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service
procedures to the passenger seat assem-
bly, its related components, seat cover or
cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or
serious injury to the front passenger if
the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, con-
tact your authorized dealer.
107
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the
knee impact bolsters such as alarm
lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instru-
ment panel below the steering column and a
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
mounted in the instrument panel below the
glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee
Air Bags provide enhanced protection during
a frontal impact by working together with the
seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats and rear (in vehicles equipped
with outboard rear seat SABs) seats. The
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on
the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts,
in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover
(front seats) and the seam on the outboard
side of the seat cushion’s trim cover (out-
board rear seats — if equipped with rear
SABs).. The inflating SAB deploys through
the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a
very high speed and with such a high force
that it could injure occupants if they are not
seated properly, or if items are positioned in
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bag Label
SAFETY
108
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploy-
ing air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air
Bags; the performance could be adversely
affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-
tains (SABICs) are located above the side
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is
labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addi-
tion to the injury reduction potential provided
by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the
side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way
and covers the window. The SABICs inflate
with enough force to injure occupants if they
are not belted and seated properly, or if items
are positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu-
pants through side windows in certain side
impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack lug-
gage or other cargo up high enough to
block the deployment of the SABICs.
The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deploy-
ment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as in-
tended, do not install any accessory
items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sun-
roof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
109
WARNING!
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the de-
ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the ap-
propriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air
Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during
impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant
protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact de-
ploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-
side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags
only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at cer-
tain angles, or some side collisions that do
not impact the area of the passenger com-
partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions
where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in
less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags
can be seriously injured or killed. Occu-
pants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or
child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your pro-
tection in all collisions. They also help
keep you in position, away from an in-
flating Side Air Bag. To get the best
protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly
and sit upright with their backs against
WARNING!
the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster
seat that is appropriate for the size of the
child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags
during deployment could cause you to
be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a colli-
sion. The Side Air Bags work with your
seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
SAFETY
110
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in cer-
tain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the de-
ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage
by itself is not a good indicator of whether or
not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover
events. The rollover sensing-system deter-
mines if a rollover event may be in progress
and whether deployment is appropriate. A
slower-developing event may deploy the seat
belt pretensioners on both sides of the ve-
hicle. A faster-developing event may deploy
the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side
Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The
rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the
Side Air Bags, on both sides of the vehicle if
the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu-
pants through side windows in certain roll-
over or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and intercon-
necting wiring associated with electrical Air
Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the
air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the oc-
cupants as the air bags deploy and unfold.
The abrasions are similar to friction rope
burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blis-
tering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gen-
erates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irri-
tate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you
111
have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area
with cool water. For nose or throat irritation,
move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags
have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt preten-
sioners cannot protect you in another col-
lision. Have the air bags, seat belt preten-
sioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air
bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communica-
tion network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of
the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery
has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for 15
minutes from the intervention of the En-
hanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to
the Enhanced Accident Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circu-
lation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
– Engine
– Electric Motor (if equipped)
– Electric power steering
– Brake booster
– Electric park brake
– Automatic transmission gear selector
– Horn
– Front wiper
– Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position
and remove the key from the ignition switch
to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine com-
partment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine. If there
are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below.
SAFETY
112
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from igni-
tion START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Care-
fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air
bag system is not there to protect you.
Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim
cover or the upper right side of the in-
strument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to
tell anyone who works on your vehicle
that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function prop-
erly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, in-
cluding your trim cover and cushion,
needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to your authorized dealer. Only manufac-
turer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities,
contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
113
gender, age, and crash location) are re-
corded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash investiga-
tion.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled
up at all times, including babies and chil-
dren. Every state in the United States, and
every Canadian province, requires that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for
ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if avail-
able. According to crash statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle.
The force required to hold even an infant
on your lap could become so great that you
could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could
be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper re-
straint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of re-
straints for children from newborn size to the
child almost large enough for an adult safety
belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow
all the instructions and warnings in the child
restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the la-
bels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
all applicable Safety Standards. You should
also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or
call: 1–888–327–4236
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
SAFETY
114
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight lim-
its of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of
their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-
point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-
facing child restraint, but are too small to prop-
erly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two
years old or until they reach either the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing child re-
straint. Two types of child restraints can be
used rear-facing: infant carriers and convert-
ible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in
the vehicle. It is recommended for children
from birth until they reach the weight or
height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible
child seats often have a higher weight limit in
the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by chil-
dren who have outgrown their infant carrier
but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by
their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
115
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years
old or who have outgrown the rear-facing
weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should re-
main in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the
highest weight or height allowed by the child
seat.
All children whose weight or height is above
the forward-facing limit for the child seat
should use a belt-positioning booster seat
until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If
the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back
is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure
of an infant or child restraint. It could
come loose in a collision. The child
could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-
tions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can
loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before ad-
justing the vehicle seat position. When
the vehicle seat has been adjusted, re-
install the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt
or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from
the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks
and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use
this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably
over the front of the vehicle seat – while
the child is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs and
not the stomach?
SAFETY
116
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a
booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is
using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt
fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
WARNING!
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the
seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Re-
straint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing Child Re-
straint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
117
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child re-
straint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seat-
ing position. These anchorages are used to
install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating
positions may have a top tether anchorage
but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child re-
straint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Re-
straints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
LATCH Label
Second Row LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 An-
chorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY
118
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in
the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All rear head restraints may be removed.
119
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the
seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems
will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible
strap on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to
the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages
in the rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used
for the right outboard position behind the
front passenger (1). Anchorages D and E are
used for the left outboard position behind the
driver (3). Anchorages C and D are used for
the center seating position (2). Do not install
a LATCH-compatible child restraint using an-
chorages B and C. This is not a LATCH–
compatible position in your vehicle.
You can install up to two child seats using the
LATCH system at the same time. If you can fit
three child restraints in your vehicle, you
must use the seat belt to install the center
child restraint and you must use the LATCH
anchors for position (3) behind the driver.
You can use either the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for installing the third
child seat in position (1) behind the front
passenger.
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchorage Locations
SAFETY
120
Options for installing two child seats using
the LATCH anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions
(1 and 3): Install the child seats in the
right and left outboard seating positions
using lower anchorages A and B, and D
and E. Do not use the center seat anchor-
age, C. If the child seats do not block the
center seat belt webbing and buckle, the
center seat belt can be used to restraint
an occupant or child restraint in the cen-
ter seating position.
2. Right outboard and center seating posi-
tions (1 and 2): Install the first child seat
in the right outboard seating position us-
ing lower anchorages A and B. Install the
second child seat using the center anchor-
ages, C and D. Do not use the outer
anchorage closest to the opposite door, E.
Do not use the remaining left outboard
seating position (3) for any occupant. The
center child restraint will block the seat
belt buckle for this position.
WARNING!
• Use anchorages C and D to install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint in
the center seating position (2). Do not
install a LATCH-compatible child re-
straint using anchorages B and C. This
is not a LATCH-compatible position in
your vehicle.
• A child restraint installed in the center
position (2) will block the seat belt
buckle for the empty left outboard seat
WARNING!
behind the driver (3). Do not use this
seat for another occupant.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
• If you are installing three child re-
straints next to each other, you must
use the seat belt and the center tether
anchor for the center position. You
must use the LATCH anchors to install
the child seat in position (3), behind
the driver. You may use either the
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat
belt for installing the child seat in po-
sition (1), behind the front passenger.
Please refer to “Installing the LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint System”
for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child re-
straint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
Lower Anchors
121
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Re-
straint
If the selected seating position has a Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-
tions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of
the child restraint to the lower anchorages
in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage.
See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat
belts that are not being used by other occu-
pants or being used to secure child restraints.
An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint
using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-
feres with the child restraint installation,
instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not
lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly-fitted child restraints. Un-
der no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or
SAFETY
122
WARNING!
for attaching other items or equipment
to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Ve-
hicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to prop-
erly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an in-
fant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is de-
signed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked
mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR
will make a clicking noise while the webbing
is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the
“Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child re-
straint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
123
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child re-
straint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All rear head restraints may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child re-
straint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating posi-
tion with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to prop-
erly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most posi-
tion to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap
portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to re-
tract back into the retractor. As the web-
bing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to
pull out any webbing. If the retractor is
not locked, repeat step 5.
SAFETY
124
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-
facing car seat to any location in front of
the car seat, including the seat frame or a
tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the
vehicle seat. See the section “Lower An-
chors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to
find the tether anchorage. You may need
to move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to an-
other position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the an-
chor and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head re-
straints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap un-
der the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
125
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap accord-
ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap
could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split
rear seat, make sure the tether strap
does not slip into the opening between
the seatbacks as you remove slack in the
strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could
harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be
thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a colli-
sion.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured
by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Tether Anchorage Locations
SAFETY
126
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con-
tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is col-
orless and odorless. Breathing it can make
you unconscious and can eventually poi-
son you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage
or in confined areas any longer than
needed to move your vehicle in or out of
the area.
• If you are required to drive with the
trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure
that all windows are closed and the cli-
mate control BLOWER switch is set at
high speed. DO NOT use the recircula-
tion mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force out-
side air into the vehicle. Set the blower
at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body ar-
eas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the sys-
tem.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding
seat belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN.
If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this
light will illuminate with a single chime when
a fault with the Air Bag System has been
detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have your autho-
rized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
127
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost
mode and place the blower control on high
speed. You should be able to feel the air
directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster
is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor
mat that is securely attached using the floor
mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position
and interfere with the accelerator, brake or
clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
WARNING!
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to
confirm mat is secured using the floor
mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit
your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat
that cannot be properly attached and
secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on
the driver’s side floor area. To check for
interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully depress
the accelerator, the brake, and the
WARNING!
clutch pedal (if present) to check for
interference. If your floor mat interferes
with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat
on the passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall
or slide into the driver’s side floor area
when the vehicle is moving. Objects can
become trapped under accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals and could cause
a loss of vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These ob-
jects could change the position of the
floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed
and re-installed, always properly attach
carpet to the floor and check the floor
mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle
carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
SAFETY
128
WARNING!
check for interference with the accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals then re-
install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat
has been properly installed and is se-
cured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones,
nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the
tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare)
for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and lock-
ing.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid
leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or
if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected imme-
diately.
129
130
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .......133
Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine . . .133
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS ........133
PARKING BRAKE ............134
Electric Park Brake (EPB) .........134
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . .136
Key Ignition Park Interlock ........137
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System ....................137
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . .137
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION................139
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) —
If Equipped .................139
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4x4) —
If Equipped..................140
Shift Positions ................141
Shifting Procedures .............141
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker)
System — If Equipped ...........143
SELEC-TERRAIN ............144
Description ..................144
STOP/START SYSTEM —
IFEQUIPPED...............145
Automatic Mode ...............145
Possible Reasons The Engine Does
Not Autostop .................145
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode .....................146
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ....................146
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ....................147
SPEEDCONTROL............147
Activation ...................147
Setting A Desired Speed .........148
Varying The Speed .............148
Resume ...................149
Accelerating For Passing .........149
Deactivation .................149
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC)....................149
Activation ..................150
Setting A Desired ACC Speed .......150
Varying The Speed .............150
Resume ....................151
Deactivation .................152
Setting The Following Distance ......152
Changing Modes ..............152
General Information ............153
PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST ...................154
ParkSense Sensors .............154
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . .154
Instrument Cluster Display —
Warning ....................154
ParkSense System Usage Precautions. .154
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR
PARKASSIST...............155
ParkSense Sensors .............155
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . .156
Engagement/Disengagement .......156
Operation With A Trailer ..........157
General Warnings ..............157
STARTING AND OPERATING
131
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST ...................157
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
Active Park Assist .............157
LANESENSE................158
LaneSense Operation ............158
Turning LaneSense On Or Off .......159
LaneSense Warning Message .......159
Changing LaneSense Status........161
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP
CAMERA ..................161
Symbols And Messages On The
Display ....................161
REFUELING THE VEHICLE......161
TRAILER TOWING ...........163
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) ...........163
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . .164
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ....................164
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel
Drive (FWD) Models ............165
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models
With 1-Speed Power Transfer Unit . . .165
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models
With 2-Speed Power Transfer Unit . . . .165
STARTING AND OPERATING
132
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock
your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the key-
less ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
WARNING!
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or push-
ing the accelerator pedal.
Place your foot on the brake and place the
ignition to the START mode and release when
the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Place the ignition in the START mode and
release it as the starter engages. The starter
motor will automatically disengage itself
once engine is running. If the engine fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically
in 10 seconds. If this occurs:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle)
in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles
(100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or
90 km/h) are desirable.
133
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contrib-
utes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental
and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving
type lubricant. Oil changes should be consis-
tent with anticipated climate conditions un-
der which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality
grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during
its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a nor-
mal part of the break-in and not interpreted
as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with a new Electric
Park Brake System (EPB) that offers greater
convenience. The park brake switch is lo-
cated in the center console.
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on
the switch momentarily. The BRAKE telltale
light in the instrument cluster and an indica-
tor on the switch will illuminate.
To release the park brake manually, the igni-
tion must be in ON/RUN. Then put your foot
on the brake pedal and push the park brake
switch down momentarily. Once the park
brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE telltale
light and the switch indicator will extinguish.
The park brake can also be automatically
released. With the engine running and the
transmission in gear, release the brake pedal
and depress the throttle pedal. For safety
reasons, your seat belt must also be fastened.
NOTE:
• You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the parking
brake engages or disengages.
• If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
are engaging or disengaging the parking
brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement.
• The new Auto Park Brake feature can be
used to apply the park brake automatically
every time you park the vehicle. Auto Park
Brake can be enabled and disabled in the
Settings menu in Uconnect.
Parking Brake Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
134
• The parking brake can be engaged even
when the ignition is OFF, however, it can
only be disengaged when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN mode.
• SafeHold a new feature that will automati-
cally apply the park brake under certain
conditions. The EPB monitors the status of
the driver’s seat belt, driver’s door and
pedal positions to determine if the driver
may have exited while the vehicle is still
capable of moving and will then automati-
cally apply the park brake to prevent the
vehicle from rolling.
• The EPB fault light will illuminate if the
EPB switch is held for longer than 20 sec-
onds in either the released or applied posi-
tion. The light will extinguish upon releas-
ing the switch.
• Refer to the Starting And Operating section
in the Owner’s Manual.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains
on with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
CAUTION!
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a sub-
stitute for the parking brake. Always ap-
ply the parking brake fully when exiting
the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or dam-
age.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
WARNING!
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake
when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll
and cause damage or injury. Also be
certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or in-
jury.
• Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake engaged, or repeated use of the
parking brake to slow the vehicle may
cause serious damage to the brake sys-
tem.
135
Auto Park Brake
The electric park brake can be programmed
to be applied automatically whenever the
vehicle is at a standstill and the automatic
transmission is placed in PARK, whenever
the ignition is turned “OFF”. Auto Park Brake
is enabled and disabled by customer selec-
tion through the customer programmable fea-
tures section of the Uconnect Settings.
Any single auto park brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the
release position while the transmission is
placed in PARK.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric
Park Brake System that will engage the park
brake automatically if the vehicle is left un-
secured while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the park brake
will automatically engage if all of the follow-
ing conditions are met:
• The vehicle is at a standstill.
• There is no attempt to depress the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pushing the Electric Park Brake Switch while
the driver door is open. Once manually by-
passed, SafeHold will be enabled again once
the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the
ignition is turned to the OFF position and
back to ON again.
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle.
As with all vehicles, you should never
exit a vehicle while the engine is run-
ning. Before exiting a vehicle, always
come to a complete stop, then apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission
into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and
remove the key fob. When the ignition is
in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position,
(or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the
ignition is in the OFF mode) the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never use the PARK position as a sub-
stitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when exit-
ing the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or dam-
age.
STARTING AND OPERATING
136
WARNING!
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before exiting the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
(in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the ve-
hicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not ob-
served:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal
while shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition
Park Interlock which requires the transmis-
sion to be in PARK before the ignition can be
turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal) posi-
tion. The key fob can only be removed from
the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/
OFF position, and the transmission is locked
in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Trans-
mission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must
be in the ON/RUN mode (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRND) is dis-
played both beside the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
press the lock button on the gear selector and
move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the
137
transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL,
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects REVERSE
while driving forward), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the re-
quested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver
inputs, along with environmental and road
conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts
on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt.
This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been devel-
oped to meet the needs of current and future
FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and calibration
is refined to optimize the customer’s driving
experience and fuel economy. By design,
some vehicle and driveline combinations uti-
lize 9th gear only in very specific driving
situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and
the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your
foot on the brake pedal when shifting be-
tween these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift posi-
tions. Manual downshifts can be made using
the ERS shift control. Moving the gear selec-
tor into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the
DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, dis-
plays the current gear in the instrument clus-
ter, and prevents automatic upshifts beyond
this gear. In ERS mode, toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) will
change the highest available gear.
Refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Op-
eration” in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position
(when pushed forward) it is probably in the
ERS (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
tion). In ERS mode, the transmission gear
limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. Move the gear selector to the
right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access
to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING
138
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If
Equipped
This feature provides on-demand four-wheel
drive (4X4). The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills re-
quired. Under normal driving conditions, the
front wheels provide most of the traction. If
the front wheels begin to lose traction, power
is shifted automatically to the rear wheels.
The greater the front wheel traction loss, the
greater the power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy
throttle input (where one may have no wheel
spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a
pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and
type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be
used. Unequal tire size may cause failure
of the power transfer unit.
1-Speed 4X4 Switch
139
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4x4) — If
Equipped
The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in
the normal driving mode. The Selec-Terrain
buttons provide three selectable mode posi-
tions:
• 4WD LOW
• REAR LOCK (If Equipped)
• NEUTRAL
When additional traction is required, the
4WD LOW range position can be used to
provide an additional gear reduction which
allows for increased torque to be delivered to
both the front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is
intended for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Driving in 4WD LOW on dry, hard-
surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW,
the engine speed is approximately three
times that of the normal driving mode at a
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and cause dam-
age to the driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
2-Speed 4x4 Switch
2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock)
STARTING AND OPERATING
140
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each 4WD system mode position, see
the information below:
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the
powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recre-
ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
power transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N)
position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position
disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow
the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission
is in PARK. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It
provides an additional gear reduction which
allows for increased torque to be delivered to
both the front and rear wheels while providing
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” for
further information on the various positions
and their intended usages.
Shifting Procedures
Shifting Into 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition in the ON mode and the
engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW” button
once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the
instrument cluster will begin to flash and
remain on solid when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
message will flash from the instrument clus-
ter display with instructions on how to com-
plete the requested shift. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To know
Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
Selec-Terrain Switch
141
Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition in the ON mode and the
engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW” button
once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the
instrument cluster will flash and go out when
the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
message will flash from the instrument
cluster display with instructions on how to
complete the requested shift. Refer to “In-
strument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible
with the vehicle completely stopped; how-
ever, difficulty may occur due to the mating
clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift comple-
tion to occur. The preferred method is with
the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h).
If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow the
shift.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
power transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N)
position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position
disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow
the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission
is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground and shift the transmission to
PARK.
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode,
but do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,
push and hold the recessed power transfer
unit NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the
selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol
will blink, indicating shift in progress. The
light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete.
Neutral Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
142
7. After the shift is completed and the NEU-
TRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEU-
TRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
13. Apply the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn
the engine OFF, and remove the key kob.
Repeat steps 1-7 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
When towing this vehicle behind another ve-
hicle, the Mopar flat tow wiring kit must be
used, and the parking brake must be re-
leased. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in
"Starting and Operating" for further instruc-
tions.
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System
— If Equipped
The Rear E-Locker System features a me-
chanical locking rear differential to provide
better traction in the 4WD LOW position. The
“REAR LOCK” button is on the Selec-Terrain
Knob.
Activating The Rear E-Locker
To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the
following conditions must be met:
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
2. The ignition in the ON mode and the
engine running.
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH
(24 km/h).
4. To engage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR
LOCK button once.
Deactivating The Rear E-Locker System
To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the
following conditions must be met:
1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the
REAR LOCK indicator light on.
2. The ignition in the ON mode and the
engine running.
3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, push the
REAR LOCK button once.
NOTE:
• It may also be necessary to drive slowly
steering back and forth to complete en-
gagement and disengagement of the
E-Locker.
• When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indica-
tor lights in the instrument cluster and on
the REAR LOCK button will begin to flash.
When the shift is complete the REAR LOCK
indicator lights will remain on.
• When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indi-
cator lights in the instrument cluster and on
the REAR LOCK button will begin to flash.
When the shift is complete the REAR LOCK
indicator lights will remain off.
• Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is
possible with the vehicle completely
stopped; however, difficulty may occur due
to the mating clutch teeth not being prop-
erly aligned. Several attempts may be re-
quired for clutch teeth alignment and shift
completion to occur. The preferred method
143
is for the vehicle to be rolling, below
15 MPH (24 km/h), while including right
and left steering maneuvers to allow for the
clutch teeth to align.
• The Rear E-Locker System must be disen-
gaged prior to taking the vehicle out of 4WD
LOW range. If 4WD LOW shift conditions/
interlocks are not met, a message will flash
from the instrument cluster display with
instructions on how to complete the re-
quested shift.
SELEC-TERRAIN
Description
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of
the vehicle control systems, along with driver
input, to provide the best performance for all
terrains.
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the
desired mode.
Selec-Terrain offers the following modes:
• Auto — Fully automatic full time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off road.
Balances traction with seamless steering
feel to provide improved handling and ac-
celeration over two-wheel drive vehicles.
• Snow — Tuning set for additional stability
in inclement weather. Use on and off road
on loose traction surfaces such as snow.
When in SNOW mode (depending on cer-
tain operating conditions), the transmis-
sion may use second gear (rather than first
gear) during launches, to minimize wheel
slippage.
• Sport — This mode alters the transmis-
sion's automatic shift schedule for sportier
driving. Upshift speeds are increased to
make full use of available engine power.
NOTE:
SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW
is selected.
• Sand/Mud — Off-road calibration for use on
low traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or
wet grass. Driveline is maximized for trac-
tion. Some binding may be felt on less
forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake
controls are set to limit traction control
management of throttle and wheel spin.
• Rock — Off-road calibration only available
in 4WD LOW range. Traction based tuning
with improved steer-ability for use on high
traction off-road surfaces. Use for low
speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep
ruts, etc.
Selec-Terrain Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
144
NOTE:
• Rock mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Off-Road package.
• Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec
Speed Control for steep downhill control.
See “Electronic Brake Control System” in
“Safety” for further information.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function was developed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will
stop the engine automatically during a ve-
hicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the
accelerator pedal will automatically restart
the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a Heavy
Duty Battery, Starter, as well as other engine
parts, to handle the Additional engine starts.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time,
the system will go into STOP/START READY
and if all other conditions are met, can go
into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Au-
tostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START
READY state. A STOP/START READY mes-
sage will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display within the Stop/Start sec-
tion. Refer to “Warning Lights And Mes-
sages” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” in your Owner’s Manual.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The gear selector must be in a forward gear
and the brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer
will move to the zero position and the Stop/
Start telltale will illuminate indicating you
are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” in your Owner’s
Manual.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will
check many safety and comfort conditions to
see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information
about the operation of the Stop/Start system
may be viewed in the instrument cluster dis-
play Stop/Start Screen. In the following situ-
ations the engine will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and
an acceptable cabin temperature has not
been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
145
• Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward or
reverse gear.
• Hood is open.
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode (if
equipped with 4WD).
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure with vehicle in DRIVE position.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop In-
clude:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
• 5 mph threshold not achieved from previ-
ous AUTOSTOP.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the STOP/START sys-
tem going into a STOP/START READY state
under more extreme conditions of the items
listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the
throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission
will automatically re-engage upon engine re-
start.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission gear selector is moved out
of DRIVE except in the PARK position.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode (if
equipped with 4WD).
Conditions That Force An Application Of The
Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
• The driver’s door is open and brake pedal
released.
• The driver’s door is open and the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled.
• The engine hood has been opened.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the
engine off, the engine may require a manual
restart and the electric park brake may re-
quire a manual release (depress brake pedal
and push Electric Park Brake switch). Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Own-
er’s Manual.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System
1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located
on the switch bank). The light on the
switch will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING
146
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will ap-
pear in the instrument cluster display.
Refer to “Warning Lights And Messages”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” in your Owner’s Manual.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off
the STOP/START system), the engine will
not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself
back to the ON mode every time the igni-
tion is turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System
Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch will
turn off.
For complete details on the Stop/Start Sys-
tem, refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” section located in
your Owner’s Manual.
SPEED CONTROL
The Speed Control switches are located on
the right side of the steering wheel.
Activation
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control, “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will
appear on the instrument cluster display to
STOP/START OFF Switch
Speed Control Switches
1 — Push Cancel
2 — Push Set+/Accel
3 — Push Resume
4 — Push On/Off
5 — Push Set-/Decel
147
indicate the Speed Control is on. Push the
on/off button a second time to turn the sys-
tem off, “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will ap-
pear on the instrument cluster display to
indicate the Speed Control is off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could acci-
dentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
Setting A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the se-
lected speed. Once a speed has been set, a
message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h)” will appear indicating what speed was
set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with set
speed will also appear and stay on in the instru-
ment cluster display when the speed is set.
Varying The Speed
Once the Speed Control has been activated,
the speed can be increased or decreased.
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for
more information. The speed increment
shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for
more information. The speed increment
shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
STARTING AND OPERATING
148
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Resume
To resume a previously selected set speed in
memory, push and release the RES button.
Accelerating For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Deactivation
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANC button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the igni-
tion switch OFF erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (ACC)
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive
Cruise Control, the controls operate exactly
the same as the Speed Control with only a
couple of differences. With this option, you
can set a specified distance you would like to
maintain between you and the vehicle in front
of you.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
automatically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Adaptive Cruise Switches
1—
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/
Off
2 — Distance Setting – Decrease
3 — Distance Setting – Increase
149
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead
of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
Activation
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button.
“ACC READY” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the ACC is on.
Setting A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display
will show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the
system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the
current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close prox-
imity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
If you do not, the vehicle may continue to
accelerate beyond the set speed. If this oc-
curs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the dis-
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be de-
termined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
Varying The Speed
Once the ACC has been activated, the speed
can be increased or decreased.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) buttons, the new set
speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does
not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach
the set speed, the brake system will auto-
matically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to
a full stop when following a target vehicle.
If an ACC host vehicle follows a target
vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle will
release the vehicle brakes two seconds af-
ter coming to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving up hill and down hill. However, a
slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. In addition, downshifting may oc-
cur while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This is normal operation and nec-
essary to maintain set speed. When driving
up hill and down hill, the ACC system will
cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information. The speed increment
shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
STARTING AND OPERATING
150
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be de-
creased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information. The speed increment
shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released.
The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released.
The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the
RES (resume) button and remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. The instrument
cluster display will show the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer
than two seconds, the driver will either have
to push the RES (resume) button or apply
the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC
to the existing set speed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a station-
ary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close
proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used
if traffic and road conditions permit. Re-
suming a set speed that is too high or too
151
WARNING!
low for prevailing traffic and road condi-
tions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe opera-
tion. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Deactivation
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button a second time to turn the
system off.
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off” will ap-
pear in the instrument cluster display to
indicate the ACC is off.
Setting The Following Distance
The specified following distance for ACC can
be set by varying the distance setting be-
tween four bars (longest), three bars (long),
two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using
this distance setting and the vehicle speed,
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting appears
in the instrument cluster display.
• To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting—Increase button and re-
lease. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting increases by one bar (lon-
ger).
• To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting—Decrease button and re-
lease. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
Changing Modes
If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode
can be turned off and the system can be
operated as a Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control mode. When in the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode the distance
setting feature will be disabled and the sys-
tem will maintain the speed you set.
• To change between the different cruise
control modes, push the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) on/off button which turns the
ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control off.
• Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control mode.
Refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Con-
trol Mode” in “Starting And Operating” in
your Owner's Manual for further information.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions, ve-
hicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete atten-
tion is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Fail-
ure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal
injury.
The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
STARTING AND OPERATING
152
WARNING!
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance con-
ditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop
position. If the target vehicle does not
start moving within two seconds the ACC
system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that
the brakes must be applied manually. An
audible chime will sound when the
brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway con-
struction zones).
WARNING!
• When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-
taining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode for cruising at a constant preset
speed. For additional information, refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in your Owner’s Manual for fur-
ther information.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will
not react to preceding vehicles. Always be
aware of the mode selected. You can
change the mode by using the Cruise Con-
trol buttons. The two control modes func-
WARNING!
tion differently. Always confirm which
mode is selected.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
153
PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster
display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds. Re-
fer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service.
The ParkSense switch LED will be off when
the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momen-
tarily, and then the LED will be on.
Instrument Cluster Display — Warning
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected
from the Customer - Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner's Manual for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located
within the instrument cluster display. It pro-
vides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the de-
tected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in your Owner's Manual for further
information.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi-
brations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instru-
ment cluster display will read
“PARKSENSE OFF”. Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until
you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is
turned off, the instrument cluster display
will show a “PARKSENSE OFF” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the vol-
ume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, tak-
ing care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to
do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not
STARTING AND OPERATING
154
detect an obstacle behind the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the
liftgate is in the open position and the
vehicle is in REVERSE. An open liftgate
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
WARNING!
structions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. You are responsible for safety
and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, in-
cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs
CAUTION!
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is de-
tected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND
REAR PARK ASSIST
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
155
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system, six sen-
sors will be located in the rear fascia/bumper.
Refer to the "ParkSense Active Park Assist
System" section for further information.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front
of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field
of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster
display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds. Re-
fer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service.
The ParkSense switch LED will be off when
the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momen-
tarily, and then the LED will be on.
Engagement/Disengagement
To disengage the system, push the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the system passes from engaged to
disengaged and vice versa, it is always ac-
companied by a dedicated message in the
instrument cluster display.
System engaged: ParkSense switch LED off.
System disengaged: ParkSense switch LED on
constantly.
ParkSense Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
156
The ParkSense switch LED lights up also in
the case of a ParkSense system failure. If the
button is pushed with a system failure, the
ParkSense switch LED flashes for about
5 seconds, then it stays on constantly.
After the ParkSense has been disengaged, it
will stay in this condition until the following
engagement, even if the ignition device
passes from ON/RUN to OFF and then again
to ON/RUN.
Operation With A Trailer
The operation of the sensors is automatically
deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is
inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket. The
sensors are automatically reactivated when
the trailer's cable plug is removed.
General Warnings
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS” appears in the in-
strument cluster display, clean the
ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense Active
Park Assist
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can
be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch, located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel
and perpendicular parking maneuvers by
identifying a proper parking space, providing
audible/visual instructions, and controlling
the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system is defined as “semi-
automatic” since the driver maintains control
of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes.
Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle
into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or pas-
senger side).
NOTE:
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
automatically defaults to looking for vehicles
on the right. To search for a parking spot on the
left, use the left turn signal.
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further
information.
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch
157
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay atten-
tion to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds
the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, in-
cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is de-
tected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense.
LANESENSE
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at
speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below
112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system
uses a forward looking camera to detect lane
markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts out of the
lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides a haptic warning in the form
of torque applied to the steering wheel, as
well as a visual warning in the instrument
cluster display, to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across the
lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met,
the LaneSense system will monitor if the
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and
provide an audible and visual warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not de-
tected on the steering wheel. The system will
STARTING AND OPERATING
158
cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is “off”.
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “Lane-
Sense On” message is shown in the instru-
ment cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state, on or off, from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the
ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the cur-
rent lane drift condition through the instru-
ment cluster display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane bound-
aries have not been detected and the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the
LaneSense telltale is solid white when only
the left lane marking has been detected
and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes from white to gray, the left thin line
remains solid white and the LaneSense
telltale changes from solid white to flashing
yellow.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been de-
tected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane de-
parture occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and
the left thin line turn solid white. The Lane-
Sense telltale changes from solid green to
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied
to the steering wheel in the opposite direc-
tion of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes from white to gray, the left thin line
remains solid white and the LaneSense
159
telltale changes from solid yellow to flash-
ing yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane bound-
aries have not been detected and the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the
LaneSense telltale is solid white when only
the left lane marking has been detected
and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense
telltale changes from solid white to flashing
yellow.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been de-
tected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane de-
parture occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and
left thin line turn solid yellow. The Lane-
Sense telltale changes from solid green to
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied
to the steering wheel in the opposite direc-
tion of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line
remains solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-
tale changes from solid yellow to flashing
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
160
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you
can configure through the Uconnect system
screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for
further information.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warn-
ings.
• The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (anti-lock brakes, traction control
system, electronic stability control, forward
collision warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP
CAMERA
Symbols And Messages On The Display
You can see an on-screen image of the rear of
your vehicle whenever the transmission is
shifted into REVERSE. The ParkView Rear
Back-Up Camera image will be displayed on
the Uconnect Display, located on the center
stack of the instrument panel.
If the Uconnect Display appears foggy, clean
the camera lens located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
Refer to “ParkView Back-Up Camera” in
“Starting And Operating” in your Owner's
Manual for further information.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up;
even when using the ParkView Rear
Back-Up Camera. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing
WARNING!
up. You must continue to pay attention
while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView
should only be used as a parking aid.
The ParkView camera is unable to view
every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle
must be driven slowly when using
ParkView to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler
door, on the passenger side of the vehicle. If
the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap has been designed for use
with this vehicle.
161
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler
door reinforcement.
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch
(located on the driver’s side door trim).
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the
fuel filler cap.
NOTE:
• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent
the fuel door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice
buildup and re-release the fuel door using
the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn
until you hear one click. This is an indica-
tion that the cap is properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened
every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in
or near the vehicle when the fuel door is
open or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is run-
ning. This is in violation of most state
and federal fire regulations and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light”
to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always
place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
STARTING AND OPERATING
162
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission
control system could result from using
an improper fuel filler cap. A poorly
fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting after-
market cap can cause the “Malfunction
CAUTION!
Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due
to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause
the MIL to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do
not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.
CAUTION!
• If fuel is spilled on surface on the paint,
clear it immediately to avoid damage the
paint.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/Transmission Model Frontal Area
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Maximum Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.4L/Automatic with or
without Trailer Tow Package
FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
3.2L/Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
3.2L/Automatic with Trailer
Tow Package
FWD or 4WD 39.44 sq ft (3.66 sq m) 4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight refer-
enced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
163
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
4X4 Models
Towing
Condition
Wheels OFF
the Ground
Front-Wheel
Drive (FWD)
Models
1-Speed
Power Trans-
fer Unit
2-Speed Power Transfer Unit
Flat Tow NONE
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT
ALLOWED
See Instructions:
•
Before towing, see your authorized dealer for the Mopar flat tow wiring kit
• It is recommended to charge the battery of the towed vehicle during recreational towing
• Transmission in PARK
• Power transfer unit in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front OK
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The
Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
STARTING AND OPERATING
164
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accom-
plished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow ve-
hicle, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place transmis-
sion in PARK. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode,
but do not start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the parking brake.
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob,
and release the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
• Towing with the front wheels on the
ground will cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With
1-Speed Power Transfer Unit
Recreational towing is not allowed. These
models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position
in the power transfer unit.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or power transfer unit damage.
Damage from improper towing is not cov-
ered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With
2-Speed Power Transfer Unit
The power transfer unit must be shifted into
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission must be
in PARK for recreational towing. The NEU-
TRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
4WD selector switch. Shifts into and out of
NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selec-
tor switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• Failure to use the proper Mopar wiring
kit to power the steering system during
recreational towing may damage the ve-
hicle’s steering system and/or other ve-
hicle components.
165
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Tow-
ing with only one set of wheels on the
ground (front or rear) will cause severe
transmission and/or power transfer unit
damage. Tow with all four wheels either
ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using
a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the power transfer unit.
• The transmission must be in PARK for
recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting into
NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the
power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will re-
sult.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or power transfer unit
damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper
face bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
power transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N)
position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position
disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow
the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission
is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to shift the 4WD
system into NEUTRAL (N).
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the power transfer unit is fully
in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational tow-
ing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, and shift the transmission to
PARK.
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode,
but do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,
push and hold the recessed NEUTRAL (N)
button (located by the selector switch) for
four seconds. The light behind the N sym-
bol will blink, indicating shift in progress.
The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete.
STARTING AND OPERATING
166
7. After the shift is completed and the NEU-
TRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEU-
TRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
13. Apply the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn
the engine OFF, and remove the key fob.
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle
using a suitable tow bar.
16. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode,
but do not start the engine.
17. Press and hold the brake pedal.
18. Release the parking brake.
19. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key
fob, and release the brake pedal.
NOTE:
• When towing this vehicle behind another
vehicle, the Mopar flat tow wiring kit must
be used, and the parking brake must be
released.
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button, and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before
pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no
longer met during the shift, then the NEU-
TRAL (N) indicator light will flash continu-
ously until all requirements are met or until
the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the igni-
tion is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift
will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leav-
ing it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode,
but do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Neutral Button
167
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object,
push and hold the recessed power transfer
unit NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the
selector switch) for one second.
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N)
button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been
released, the power transfer unit will shift
to the position indicated by the selector
switch.
NOTE:
When shifting the power transfer unit out
of NEUTRAL (N), the engine should re-
main OFF to avoid gear clash.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, re-
lease the brake pedal, and check that
the vehicle operates normally.
16. Re-enable the Auto Park Brake feature,
if desired.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button, and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before
pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no
longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL
(N) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the igni-
tion is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift
will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
Neutral Button
STARTING AND OPERATING
168
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS ................170
Control ....................170
BULB REPLACEMENT ........170
Replacement Bulbs .............170
Replacing Exterior Bulbs..........171
FUSES....................173
General Information.............174
Underhood Fuses ..............174
Interior Fuses ................179
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING ................180
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . .180
Changing Procedure ............185
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF
EQUIPPED.................185
Tire Service Kit Storage ..........185
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation ...................186
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . .186
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . .187
JUMPSTARTING ............191
Preparations For Jump Start........191
Jump Starting Procedure..........192
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY. . . .193
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . .193
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . .193
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . .194
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . .194
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE..................195
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models .....197
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power
Transfer Unit .................197
4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power
Transfer Unit .................197
Recovery Strap — If Equipped ......198
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) . . . .199
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR) ....................199
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
169
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS
Control
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located
on the switch bank just above the climate
controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warn-
ing flasher. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition
is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
flashers may discharge the battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Cargo Lamp TL212–2
Overhead Console Lamp PLW214–2A
Reading Lamp WL212–2
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
170
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps 9005HL +
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps D3S (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Park/Daytime Running Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Front Fog Lamps PSX24W
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Back-Up Lamps W16W or 921
License Plate Lamp W5W
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage
discharge light source. High voltage can re-
main in the circuit even with the headlamp
switch off. Because of this, you should not
attempt to service a HID headlamp light
source yourself. If an HID headlamp light
source fails, take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a
blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately
10 seconds, as the system charges.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of HID headlamps when the head-
lamp switch is turned ON. It may cause
WARNING!
serious electrical shock or electrocution if
not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
1. Remove the three hex head screws from
the wheel liner.
2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards
the tire to gain access to the headlamp
bulb cap.
171
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counter-
clockwise to unlock it.
4. Firmly grasp the bulb and connector as-
sembly and rotate counterclockwise to
remove from the housing.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical
connector and then connect the replace-
ment bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fin-
gers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly
into the headlamp housing and rotate
clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Install the bulb cap in the headlamp
housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
8. Install the three hex head screws into the
wheel liner.
Front Turn Signals And Front Side Marker
Lamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing
may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs
in the upper lamp assembly on the pas-
senger side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket
assembly counterclockwise, and then re-
move the bulb and socket assembly from
the lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert
the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into
the housing, and rotate the socket clock-
wise to lock it in place.
5. Re-install air cleaner filter housing if
removed.
Front Fog Lamp
1. Remove the three hex head screws from
the wheel liner.
2. Pull the exterior edge of the wheel liner
towards the tire to gain access to the bulb.
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the
bulb socket and pull straight out from the
fog lamp.
4. Disconnect the wire harness from the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fin-
gers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new
bulb and reinstall by inserting the new
bulb straight into the fog lamp housing
until it locks in place.
6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
172
Bodyside Mounted Back-Up Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the screws that fasten the body-
side mounted lamp housing to the
vehicle.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rear-
ward to disengage the lamp from the
vehicle.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and re-
move from housing.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb and install the socket.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the bodyside lamp housing and
screws.
10. Close the liftgate.
Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver
to pry the lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Once the trim is loose, pull it back expos-
ing the trim panel.
4. Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw
driver, open the trim panel exposing the
back of the liftgate lamp.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Twist the socket counterclockwise and re-
move from lamp.
7. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
8. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.
9. Connect the electrical connector.
10. Reinstall the trim panel and the lower
trim.
11. Close the liftgate.
License Plate Lamp
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward
the locking tab on the side of the lamp
assembly and pull down on the lamp as-
sembly for removal.
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and rein-
stall the lamp assembly into place ensur-
ing the locking tab is secure.
FUSES
WARNING!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with
the same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Do not place a fuse inside a
circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Fail-
ure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or prop-
erty damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that
the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or disen-
gaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking sys-
tem), power unit systems (engine sys-
tem, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized
dealer.
173
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery dis-
charge.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in
the engine compartment near the battery.
This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-
fuses and relays. A label that identifies each
component is printed on the inside of the
cover.
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F06 – – Not Used
F07 15 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Mod - PCM (Diesel Only)
F08 25 Amp Clear – Power Control Mod (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM)/Fuel
Injection
F09 – – Not Used
F10 20 Amp Yellow – Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
F11 – – Not Used
F12 20 Amp Yellow – Brake Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
F13 10 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Mod (VSM)/Powertrain Control Mod (PCM)/
Engine Control Module (ECM)
F14 10 Amp Red – Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)/Power Take-Off Unit (PTU)/
Electric Park Brake (EPB)/RDM/Brake System Module (BSM) –
If Equipped/Brake Pedal Switch/Back Up Switch (Diesel Only)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
174
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F15 – – Not Used
F16 20 Amp Yellow – Ign Coil (Gas)/Engine Sensor (Diesel)
F17 – – Not Used
F18 – – Not Used
F19 – 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid
F20 10 Amp Red – A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 – – Not Used
F22 5 Amp Tan – Radiator Fan
F23 70 Amp Tan – Body Controller Module (BCM) – Feed 2
F23 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module (VSM) Feed #2 – If Equipped With
Stop/Start Engine Option
F24 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Wiper – If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
F25B 20 Amp Yellow – Front Washer – If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
F26 – 30 Amp Pink Fuel Heater – Diesel Only
F27 – – Not Used
F28 15 Amp Blue – Transmission Control Module (TCM)
F29 – – Not Used
F30 10 Amp Red – Engine Control Module (ECM)/(EPS)/Fuel Pump Relay Feed/
(PCM)
F31 – – Not Used
F32 – – Not Used
F33 – – Not Used
F34 – – Not Used
175
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F35 – – Not Used
F36 – – Not Used
F37 – – Not Used
F38 – 60 Amp Yellow Glow Plugs (Diesel Only) – If Equipped
F39 – 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Park Light – If Equipped
F40 – 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Washer Pump – If Equipped
F41 – 60 Amp Yellow Body Controller Module (BCM) – Feed 1
F41 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module - Feed1–IfEquipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
F42 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Electric Brake Module – If Equipped
F43 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump Motor
F44 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow / 7-Way Connector – If Equipped
F45 – 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module (PDM) – If Equipped
F46 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof – If Equipped
F48 – 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module – If Equipped
F49 – 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter (115V A/C) — If Equipped
F50 – 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate – If Equipped
F51 – – Not Used
F52 – 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers – If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
F53 – 30 Amp Pink Brake System Module & Valves
F54 – 30 Amp Pink Body Control Module (BCM) Feed 3
F55 10 Amp Red – Blind Spot Sensors/Rearview Camera
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
176
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F56 15 Amp Blue – Ignition Node Module (IGNM)/KIN/RF Hub/Electric Steering
Column Lock (ESCL)
F57 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Lights Left – If Equipped
F58 10 Amp Red – Occupant Classification Module/VSM/TT Mod/ESCL
F59 – 30 Amp Pink Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) – If Equipped
F60 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet – Center Console
F61 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Lights Right – If Equipped
F62 20 Amp Yellow – Windshield De-Icer – If Equipped
F63 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated/Vented Seats – If Equipped
F64 20 Amp Yellow – Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped
F65 10 Amp Red – In Vehicle Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor/Driver Assist
System Module (DASM)/Park Assist (PAM) – If Equipped With
Stop/Start option
F66 15 Amp Blue – HVAC (ECC)/Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
F67 10 Amp Red – In Vehicle Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor/Driver Assist
System Module (DASM)/Park Assist (PAM) – If Not Equipped
With Stop/Start Option
F68 – – Not Used
F69 10 Amp Red – Power Transfer Unit Switch (TSBM)/Active Grill Shutter (AGS) –
If Equipped With Gas Engine
F69A 10 Amp Red – Power Transfer Unit Switch (TSBM) – If Equipped With Diesel
Engine
F70 5 Amp Tan – Intelligent Battery Sensor – If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine
Option
177
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F71 20 Amp Yellow – HID Headlamp Right – If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Op-
tion
F72 10 Amp Red – Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
F73 – 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Back Up – If Equipped
F74 – 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster
F75 20 Amp Yellow – Cigar Lighter – If Equipped
F76 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Differential Module (RDM) – If Equipped
F77 10 Amp Red – Fuel Door Release/Brake Pedal Switch
F78 10 Amp Red – Diagnostic Port/Digital TV (Japan Only)
F79 10 Amp Red – Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Electric Park Brake (EPB) SW/CD
Mod/Steering Control Mod (SCCM)/HVAC/Instrument Panel
Cluster (IPC)
F80 20 Amp Yellow – Radio / CD – If Equipped
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
F83 – 20 Amp Blue Engine Controller Module (Gas)
F84 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Left
F85 – – Not Used
F86 20 Amp Yellow – Horns – If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
F87A 20 Amp Yellow – HID Headlamp Left – If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Op-
tion
F88 15 Amp Blue – Seat Belt Reminder (SBR)
F89 10 Amp Red – Headlamp Leveling – If Equipped
F90 – – Not Used
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
178
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F91 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet Rear – If Equipped – Customer Selectable
F92 – – Not Used
F93 – 40 Amp Green Brake System Module (BSM) – Pump Motor
F94 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Right
F95 10 Amp Red – Electrochromatic Mirror/Rain Sensor/Sunroof – If Equipped/
Passenger Window Switch/Power Outlet Console/Digital TV (Ja-
pan Only)
F96 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)/(Airbag)
F97 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)/(Airbag)
F98 25 Amp Clear – Audio Amplifier – If Equipped
F99 – – Not Used
F100 – – Not Used
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the Body
Control Module (BCM) in the passenger com-
partment on the left side dash panel under
the instrument panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F13 15 Amp Blue Low Beam Left
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren – If Equipped
F38 20 Amp Yellow Deadbolt All Unlock
179
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
F48 25 Amp Clear Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right – If Equipped
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Wireless Charging Pad – If Equipped
F51 10 Amp Red Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors – If Equipped
F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F89 10 Amp Red Door Locks – Driver Unlock
F91 7.5 Amp Brown Left Front Fog Lamp (Low And High Line)
F92 7.5 Amp Brown Right Front Fog Lamp (High Line)
F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving traf-
fic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dan-
gerous. The vehicle could slip off the
WARNING!
jack and fall on you. You could be
crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool
for changing tires only. The jack should
not be used to lift the vehicle for service
WARNING!
purposes. The vehicle should be jacked
on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are
stowed under the load floor behind the rear
seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
180
3. Remove the hook from the stowed posi-
tion on the back side of the load floor and
place the hook over the top body flange
and weather seal. This will hold the load
floor up while obtaining the jack and spare
tire.
4. Remove the fastener securing the jack
and spare tire.
5. Remove the chocks.
6. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt
wrench from the spare wheel as an assem-
bly. Turn the jack screw to the left to
loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove
the wrench from the jack assembly.
NOTE:
The jack handle attaches to the side of the
jack with two attachment points. When
the jack is partially expanded, the tension
between the two attachment points holds
the jack handle in place.
7. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re-
paired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as pos-
sible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid being hit
when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
Load Floor Handle
181
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking posi-
tion. For example, if changing the right
front tire, chock the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warn-
ings to help prevent personal injury or
damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when
it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is
on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indi-
cated and for lifting this vehicle during a
tire change.
WARNING!
• If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or in-
flated, are securely stowed, spares must
be stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
Wheel Chocks
Warning Label
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
182
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by
jacking on locations other than those indi-
cated in the Jacking Instructions for this
vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel
bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where
the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use
the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center
cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the
wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.
Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area
that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack
screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle inside the cut-
out in the sill cladding.
Jacking Locations Rear Jack Location Engaged
183
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove
the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.
Raise the vehicle only enough to remove
the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack
assembly and thread the pin into the
wheel hub to assist in mounting the spare
tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not at-
tempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” in the Owner's Manual
for further information about the spare
tire, its use, and operation.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turn-
ing the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of
the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened
twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications”
in “Technical Specifications” for the
proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or at a service station.
12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks,
and flat tire.
Front Jack Location Engaged
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
184
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re-
paired or replaced immediately.
Changing Procedure
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the
threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of
the handle for increased leverage. Tighten
the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Re-
fer to “Torque Specifications” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for the proper lug bolt
torque. If in doubt about the correct tight-
ness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or ser-
vice station.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the
wheel chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench
to the jack assembly and stow it in the
spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided. Release the parking
brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel
bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure
that all wheel bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF
EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the
tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should
not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit
can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal,
allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100
miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load
floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
185
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or seal-
ant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this posi-
tion for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this
mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this posi-
tion to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose
(clear hose) (6) when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once
to turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off
the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-
inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
(1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expi-
ration date (printed at the lower right hand
corner on the bottle label) to assure opti-
mum operation of the system. Refer to
section “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Re-
placement” in “Sealing a Tire with Tire
Service Kit” in this section.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose
(6) are a one tire application use and need
to be replaced after each use. Always re-
place these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a
liquid form, clean water and a damp cloth
will remove the material from the vehicle or
tire and wheel components. Once the seal-
ant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant
Bottle
5 — Mode Select
Knob
2 — Deflation
Button
6 — Sealant Hose
(Clear)
3 — Pressure
Gauge
7 — Air Pump
Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug
(located on the
bottom side of the
Tire Service Kit)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
186
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory Stor-
age Compartment (on the bottom of the air
pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode
when inflating such items to avoid injecting
sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures
less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side
of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circum-
stances:
WARNING!
– If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from
driving with extremely low tire pres-
sure.
– If the tire has any damage from
driving on a flat tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of
the tire or the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always
stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are seri-
ous or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of
Tire Service Kit to come in contact with
hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit
WARNING!
sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation.
Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if
there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution con-
tains latex. In case of an allergic reaction
or rash, consult a physician immedi-
ately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and
drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service
Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.
187
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel
with the deflated tire) is in a position that
is near to the ground. This will allow the
Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach
the valve stem and keep the Tire Service
Kit flat on the ground. This will provide
the best positioning of the kit when inject-
ing the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this
position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto
transmission) or in Gear (manual trans-
mission) and place the ignition in the OFF
position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and
turn to the Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then
remove the cap from the fitting at the end
of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the
plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power
outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into
The Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON
the Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have
the parking brake engaged and the gear se-
lector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the
sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Seal-
ant Bottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6)
and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0
– 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the
Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant
Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure
the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Sealant Mode position and not Air
Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn
On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or
another vehicle, if available. Make sure
the engine is running before turning ON
the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due
to previous use. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode
and the pump is operating, air will dispense
from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the
Sealant Hose (6).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
188
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until seal-
ant is no longer flowing through the hose
(typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the
sealant flows through the Sealant Hose
(6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as
high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure
Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from ap-
proximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual
tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1)
is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the
tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle
(1) is empty. Continue to operate the
pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the
driver-side latch pillar (recommended
pressure). Check the tire pressure by look-
ing at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not at-
tempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the
Deflation Button (2) to reduce the tire pres-
sure to the recommended inflation pressure
before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the
Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the
sticker on the instrument panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
(6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap
on the fitting at the end of the hose, and
place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D)
“Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug
(8) may get hot after use, so it should be
handled carefully.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result
in sealant contacting your skin, clothing,
and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result
in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and in-
flating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles
(8 km) or ten minutes to ensure distribution
of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and re-
paired or replaced after using Tire Service
Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
189
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “When-
ever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” before
continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and
turn to the Air Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in
color) and screw the fitting at the end of
hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading
the Pressure Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis-
tance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the
pressure indicated on the tire and loading
information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pres-
sure to the recommended inflation pres-
sure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
instrument panel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Seal-
ant Hose (6) assembly at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “(F)
Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the
authorized dealer or service center that the
tire has been sealed using the Tire Service
Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in
color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release
button in the recessed area under the
sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button.
The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Re-
move the bottle and dispose of it
accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire
Service Kit housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the
housing so that the Sealant Hose (6)
aligns with the hose slot in the front of the
housing. Push the bottle into the housing.
An audible click will be heard indicating
the bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6)
and return the hose to its storage area
(located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage
location in the vehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
190
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery
is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack
or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the
front of the engine compartment, behind the
left headlight assembly.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling
fan whenever the hood is raised. It can
start anytime the ignition switch is ON.
You can be injured by moving fan blades.
WARNING!
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK and turn
the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnec-
essary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Positive Battery Post
191
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other
as this could establish a ground connec-
tion and personal injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting proce-
dure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged ve-
hicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the dis-
charged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has
the booster battery, let the engine idle for
a few minutes, and then start the engine
in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega-
tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)
post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the posi-
tive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+)
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start
your vehicle, you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
192
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehi-
cle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine
operation, the vehicle’s battery will dis-
charge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door,
use the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove access door located on right inte-
rior trim panel for release cable with the
tip of your key.
3. Grab the release cable tether and pull up
to release the fuel filler door.
IF YOUR ENGINE
OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating your en-
gine by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not in-
crease engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air con-
ditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continu-
ous chimes, turn the engine off immedi-
ately and call for service.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow
down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor
and the blower control to high. This allows
the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from
the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
193
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position,
you can use the following procedure to tem-
porarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, care-
fully separate the shifter bezel and boot
assembly from the center console, and
raise it up to access the gear selector
mechanism.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool
down into the gear selector override ac-
cess hole (at the right front corner of the
gear selector assembly), and push and
hold the override release lever down.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand
or snow, it can often be moved using a rock-
ing motion. Turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around the front wheels.
Push and hold the lock button on the gear
selector. Then shift back and forth between
DRIVE and REVERSE, while gently pressing
the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL for more than two sec-
onds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking mo-
tion without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
Override Access Hole
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
194
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause damage, or even failure,
of the axle and tires. A tire could explode
and injure someone. Do not spin your ve-
hicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
NOTE:
Push the “ESC Off” switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in “Partial Off” mode, before rocking
the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Con-
trol System” in “Safety” for further informa-
tion. Once the vehicle has been freed, push
the "ESC Off" switch again to restore “ESC
On” mode.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the
wheels may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. Allow the engine to
idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will mini-
mize overheating and reduce the risk of
clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shift-
ing between DRIVE and REVERSE, do
not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the
wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also dam-
age the tires. Do not spin the wheels
CAUTION!
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing
a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service. If the transmission and drivetrain are
operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be
towed as described under “Recreational Tow-
ing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
195
4X4 MODELS
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
FWD MODELS
1–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
2–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See instructions under “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
•
Transmission in PARK
• Power Transfer Unit in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed
ALL BEST METHOD
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required
to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only
tow bars and other equipment designed for
this purpose, following equipment manufac-
turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the
vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack-
ets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this ve-
hicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park
Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the cus-
tomer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total
electrical failure when the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel
dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the
ground when moving the vehicle onto a
flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, de-
frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
Note that the Safehold feature will engage
the Electric Park Brake whenever the driver's
door is opened (if the ignition is ON, trans-
mission is not in PARK, and brake pedal is
released). If you are towing this vehicle with
the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must
manually disable the Electric Park Brake
each time the driver's door is opened, by
pressing the brake pedal and then releasing
the EPB.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
196
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s
battery is discharged, refer to “Gear Selector
Override” in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK so that
the vehicle can be moved.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to
your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF of the ground
using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels
OFF of the ground (using a towing dolly, or
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is re-
leased, and remains released, while being
towed. The Electric Park Brake does not need
to be released, if all four wheels are off the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer
Unit
The manufacturer requires towing with all
four wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on
a flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
WARNING!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its
wheels on the ground. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the
ground). Internal damage to the trans-
mission or power transfer unit will occur
if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or power transfer unit
damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer
Unit
The manufacturer recommends towing with
all four wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on
a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
197
If flatbed equipment is not available and the
Power Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles with
a 2–speed Power Transfer Unit may be towed
(in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on
the ground), under the following conditions:
• The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEU-
TRAL (N).
• The transmission must be in PARK.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is re-
leased, and remains released, while being
towed.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the
ground). Internal damage to the trans-
mission or power transfer unit will occur
if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or power transfer unit
CAUTION!
damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Recovery Strap — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be included with a recovery
strap. Recovery straps do not act like tradi-
tional tow straps, chains, or winch cables.
WARNING!
Recovery straps should only be used in
emergencies to rescue stranded vehicles.
Only use Recovery straps on vehicles that
fit within the recommended GVW of your
recovery strap. Only attach recovery straps
to OE recommended anchor points or
emergency towing anchor points. Never
attach to tow ball or vehicle tie down point,
these are not designed for this purpose.
Never attach to vehicle steering, drive
train, or any other suspension compo-
nents. NEVER pull a strap over sharp
edges or abrasive surfaces that can dam-
age the recovery strap. NEVER use a dam-
WARNING!
aged strap, it has reduced strength. DO
NOT attempt to repair straps. ONLY per-
sons involved in the recovery should be in
either vehicle. No passengers. Anyone in-
side the vehicles can be struck by strap
recoil, causing serious injury. MOVE by-
standers at least 40 ft (12.2 m) from the
recovery area when using the recovery
strap.
Using Recovery Strap
1. Review all warnings and instructions first.
2. Position the recovery vehicle.
3. Connect the recovery strap.
4. Add a recovery damper or blanket.
5. Clear the danger zone.
6. Safely and slowly start pulling.
7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both
vehicles are secure and parked.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
198
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS )
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Enhanced Accident Response System
(EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record data that will assist in under-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed
under certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hit-
ting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
199
200
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ......202
Maintenance Plan ..............202
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ......204
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .....205
2.4L Engine .................205
3.2L Engine .................206
Checking Oil Level .............207
Adding Washer Fluid ............207
Maintenance-Free Battery ........207
DEALER SERVICE ...........208
Engine Oil Filter ..............208
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .........208
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......209
Windshield Wiper Blades .........212
Cooling System ...............216
Automatic Transmission ..........216
RAISINGTHEVEHICLE........216
TIRES ....................216
Tire Safety Information ..........216
Tires — General Information .......224
Tire Types ...................228
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........229
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .......230
Tire Chains (Traction Devices).......231
Tire Rotation Recommendations .....233
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTA-
TION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES..................233
Treadwear ...................234
Traction Grades ...............234
Temperature Grades.............234
STORINGTHEVEHICLE.......235
BODYWORK...............235
Preserving The Bodywork .........235
INTERIORS................236
Seats And Fabric Parts ...........236
Plastic And Coated Parts..........237
Leather Parts.................237
Glass Surfaces ...............238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
201
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-
trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Se-
vere Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil
change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil
change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be
reset by referring to the steps described un-
der “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
twelve months or 350 hours of engine run
time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours
of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km)
or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
At Every Fuel Stop:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first
sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs
before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser-
voir and brake master cylinder, fill as
needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this sec-
tion for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
•
Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten ter-
minals as required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
hoses and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection
and hoses
•
Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty
or off-road conditions
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
202
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends, and replace if
necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and re-
place if necessary.
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mile-
age based only, yearly intervals do not
apply.
203
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a com-
petent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km)
or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environ-
ment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of
vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
204
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.4L Engine
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Battery
2 — Oil Fill Cap 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
205
3.2L Engine
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Oil Filter Access Cover 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 9 — Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Battery
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
206
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the en-
gine oil must be maintained at the correct
level. Check the oil level at regular intervals,
such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five min-
utes after a fully warmed up engine is shut
off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high
end of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the
reading is at the low end of the dipstick range
will raise the oil level to the high end of the
range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase
will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure.
This could damage your engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield and rear window washers
share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid res-
ervoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level
in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system
for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this
will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield
washer system in cold weather, select a solu-
tion or mixture that meets or exceeds the
temperature range of your climate. This rat-
ing information can be found on most washer
fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite
and burn you. Care must be exercised
when filling or working around the washer
solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-
free battery. You will never have to add water,
nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution
and can burn or even blind you. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your eyes,
skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the
area immediately with large amounts of
water. Refer to “Jump Starting Proce-
dure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
207
WARNING!
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables
on the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the
negative cable is attached to the nega-
tive post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identi-
fied on the battery case. Cable clamps
should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the bat-
tery is in the vehicle, disconnect both
vehicle battery cables before connecting
CAUTION!
the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified ser-
vice personnel, special tools, and equipment
to perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals be-
fore attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the proper equipment. If you have any
WARNING!
doubt about your ability to perform a ser-
vice job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this
type for replacement. The quality of replace-
ment filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most
efficient service. Mopar engine oil filters are
high quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this sec-
tion for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Condi-
tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
208
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of pro-
tection in the case of engine backfire. Do
not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal
is necessary for repair or maintenance.
Make sure that no one is near the engine
compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or
debris you should change your air cleaner
filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the screws from the air cleaner
cover.
2. Push in on the quick connect clip with
your thumb and remove by pulling hose (if
equipped) away from air cleaner filter
cover.
3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air
cleaner filter.
4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris
is present before replacing the air filter ele-
ment.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into
the housing assembly with the air cleaner
filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the hous-
ing assembly locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the air cleaner
cover to the housing assembly and install
air hose (if equipped).
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air con-
ditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning
of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor
lubricants approved by the manufac-
turer for your air conditioning system.
Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you.
Other unapproved refrigerants or lubri-
cants can cause the system to fail, re-
quiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, located in your own-
er’s information kit, for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
risk of personal injury or damage to the
system, adding refrigerant or any repair
209
WARNING!
requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced tech-
nician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a
— If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-
friendly substance. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be per-
formed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by
the Environmental Protection Agency and is
an ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using re-
covery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air
Filter)
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in per-
sonal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in front of the
evaporator on the lower right of center con-
sole. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console close-
out cover.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward
to disengage the front retaining tab and
remove the cover.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
210
3. Pull down the passenger hush panel un-
der the dash panel
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down
the tab on the top of the door to release
the cover then rotate the door out and lift
up.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing. Take note of
the air filter position indicators.
Console Closeout Panel Hush Panel Air Filter Cover Location
211
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter
position indicators pointing in the same
direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the
filter. Failure to properly install the filter
will result in the need to replace it more
often.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel un-
der the dash panel and console closeout.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades
and the windshield periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner.
This will remove accumulations of salt or road
film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost
or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade
rubber out of contact with petroleum prod-
ucts such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de-
pending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following
points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with
a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper
arm or blade that is damaged.
A/C Air Filter
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
212
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade
in place or the glass may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in
the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the
wiper arm, flip up the release tab on the
wiper blade and while holding the wiper
arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade
down towards the base of the wiper arm.
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked
Position
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In
Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
213
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle
to separate the wiper blade from the wiper
arm).
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until
the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
release tab open and the blade side of the
wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade
under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade
until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into
its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the
glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away
from the glass to allow the rear wiper
blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised
off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot
cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully
raise the rear wiper arm without unsnap-
ping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage
the vehicle.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
214
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand hold the wiper
arm as you pull the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an
audible snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away
from the glass to allow the rear wiper
blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised
off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot
cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully
raise the rear wiper arm without unsnap-
ping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage
the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and apply pressure on the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it
snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
place.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
215
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator
or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts auto-
matically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
•
When working near the radiator cooling
fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn
the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at
any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec-
tion every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the sys-
tem should be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser for any accu-
mulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the en-
tire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and
does not require adjustment under normal
operating conditions. Routine fluid level
checks are not required; therefore the trans-
mission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using
special service tools. If you notice fluid leak-
age or transmission malfunction, visit an au-
thorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An au-
thorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of
the following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
216
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based
on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires
have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/
65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards. The size
designation for LT-Metric tires is the same
as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-
ceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for tem-
porary emergency use only. Temporary high
pressure compact spare tires have the letter
“T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Ex-
ample: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Stan-
dards Code
(TIN)
4 — Maximum
Load
2 — Size Desig-
nation
5 — Maximum
Pressure
3 — Service
Description
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and
Temperature
Grades
217
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
218
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of
the tire; however, the date code may only be
on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will
have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If
the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the
tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway
use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
219
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front
door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting
for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds
per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pres-
sure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
220
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must
not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the
tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of your Owner’s Manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the
front and rear axles must not be exceeded.
To determine the maximum loading condi-
tions of your vehicle, locate the statement
“The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
221
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/
luggage and trailer tongue weight (if appli-
cable) should never exceed the weight refer-
enced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5)
Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely ex-
ceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows ex-
amples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants.
This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
222
223
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stop-
ping distance. Use tires of the recom-
mended load capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by
improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that re-
sult in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail sud-
denly, resulting in loss of vehicle con-
trol.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steer-
ing problems. You could lose control of
your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of
the vehicle to the other can cause the
vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to
the recommended cold tire inflation
pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect
the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response or over respon-
siveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side
may cause erratic and unpredictable steer-
ing response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-
tion.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-
able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring
and uncomfortable ride.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
224
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge
of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could dam-
age the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard
are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold
tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to
a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F
(20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F
(0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure
should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for
this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT
reduce this normal pressure build up or your
tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits.
Where speed limits or conditions are such
that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to
fail. You could have a serious collision. Do
not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
225
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types
of tires on your vehicle will cause your
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability
could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repair-
able).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofan
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire re-
pairs and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat
tire of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after
a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid
loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat
mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the
run flat mode it has limited driving capabili-
ties and needs to be replaced immediately. A
Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle
loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while
a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice con-
ditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 sec-
onds continuously when you are stuck,
and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
226
These indicators are molded into the bottom
of the tread grooves. They will appear as
bands when the tread depth becomes a
1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement
Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These ab-
normal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating
of V or higher, and Summer tires typically
have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these
tires per the vehicle scheduled mainte-
nance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease,
and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a bal-
ance of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indi-
cators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in
the “Tire Safety Information” section of this
manual for more information relating to the
Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just
one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
227
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with
any questions you may have on tire specifi-
cations or capability. Failure to use equiva-
lent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,
or speed rating other than that specified
for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may
change suspension dimensions and per-
formance characteristics, resulting in
changes to steering, handling, and brak-
ing of your vehicle. This can cause un-
predictable handling and stress to steer-
ing and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index
or capacity, other than what was origi-
nally equipped on your vehicle. Using a
tire with a smaller load index could re-
WARNING!
sult in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedom-
eter and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all sea-
sons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter).
Traction levels may vary between different all
season tires. All season tires can be identi-
fied by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designa-
tion on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet
and dry conditions, and are not intended to
be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your
vehicle when ambient temperatures are less
than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol
on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice con-
ditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
228
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a “mountain/snowflake”
symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent
in size and type to the
original equipment
tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four;
failure to do so may
adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sus-
tained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pres-
sures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of non-
studded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an auto-
matic car wash with a compact or limited
use temporary spare installed. Damage to
the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare
tire and wheel equivalent in look and function
to the original equipment tire and wheel
found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation
for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this op-
tion, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. You can identify if your ve-
hicle is equipped with a compact spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the
sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire de-
scriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
mount a conventional tire on the compact
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
229
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary
use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle con-
trol.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use full size spare tire needs to be
replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by
a label located on the limited use spare
wheel. This label contains the driving limita-
tions for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of
this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,
do not drive more than the speed listed on
the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated
to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
WARNING!
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi-
num and chrome plated wheels, should be
cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph)
soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the
body of the vehicle and remember to always
wash when the surfaces are not hot to the
touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other
road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They
can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
230
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes
that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermar-
ket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels includ-
ing excessive brake dust, care must be taken
in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning
chemicals and equipment to prevent damage
to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or
Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-
acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven
cleaner. These products may damage the
CAUTION!
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-
mended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle
and apply the brakes to remove the water
droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake
rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when
braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing com-
pounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered
CAUTION!
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis; this is all that is re-
quired to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-
to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-
dations to guard against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the traction
device manufacturer
• Use on Front Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, the following
traction devices are recommended:
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
• Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/
55R18 tire sizes are not chainable.
• The use of 7 mm snow chains is permitted
with the use of 215/60R17 tires on size
17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
231
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models
without a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
• Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/
60R18 tire sizes are not chainable.
• The use of 9 mm snow chains is permitted
with the use of 215/60R17 tires on size
17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models
with a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
• The use of 7 mm snow chains is permitted
with 225/65R17 and 225/60R18 tires.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models
• The use of 9 mm snow chains is permitted
with the use of 225/65R17 tires on size
17 x 7.5 ET31 wheels.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type
(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles
can cause unpredictable handling. You
could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
• Use on Front Tires Only
• Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models may result if tire chains or trac-
tion devices are used with original
equipment size tires.
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD)
Models without a Two-Speed Power
Takeoff Unit may result if tire chains or
traction devices are used with original
equipment size tires.
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD)
Trailhawk Models may result if tire
chains or traction devices are used with
original equipment size tires.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other sus-
pension components, it is important
that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme-
diately if noise occurs that could indi-
cate device breakage. Remove the dam-
CAUTION!
aged parts of the device before further
use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a
loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on
dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufactur-
er’s instructions on the method of instal-
lation, operating speed, and conditions
for use. Always use the suggested oper-
ating speed of the device manufacturer’s
if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a com-
pact spare tire.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
232
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform differ-
ent steering, handling, and braking func-
tions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rota-
tion of tires. The benefits of rotation are
especially worthwhile with aggressive tread
designs such as those on On/Off Road type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels,
and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the
proper maintenance intervals. The reasons
for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rota-
tion method is the “forward cross” shown in
the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that
must not be reversed.
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire
rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive ve-
hicles depends on tires of equal size, type
and circumference on each wheel. Any
difference in tire size can cause damage to
CAUTION!
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance
tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must con-
form to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
233
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of as-
phalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not in-
clude acceleration, cornering, hy-
droplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is prop-
erly inflated and not overloaded. Ex-
cessive speed, under-inflation, or
excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
234
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for
more than a month, observe the following
precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and
possibly airy location the windows open
slightly.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not
engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from
the battery post and be sure that the battery
is fully charged. During storage check bat-
tery charge quarterly.
• If you do not disconnect the battery from
the electrical system, check the battery
charge every 30 days.
• Clean and protect the painted parts by
applying protective waxes.
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by
applying protective waxes.
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear
wiper blades and leave raised from the
glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover
taking care not to damage the painted sur-
face by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do
not use plastic sheeting which will not allow
the evaporation of moisture present on the
surface of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi
(+0.5 bar) higher than recommended on
the tire placard and check it periodically.
• Do not drain the engine cooling system.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle is station-
ary for two weeks or more, run idle the
engine for approximately five minutes, with
the air conditioning system on and high fan
speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication
of the system, thus minimizing the possi-
bility of damage to the compressor when
the vehicle is put back into operation.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or
driven for at least 30 days, an Extended Park
Start Procedure is required to start the ve-
hicle. Refer to “Starting The Engine” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and nega-
tive terminals to the battery, wait at least a
minute with ignition switch in the OFF
position and close the driver’s door. When
reconnecting the positive and negative ter-
minals to the battery be sure the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the
driver’s door is closed.
BODYWORK
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse
the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to re-
move.
235
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and
painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding
1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in
damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the re-
sponsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle re-
paired as soon as possible. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemi-
cals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure
that such materials are well packaged and
sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-
stery and carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flam-
mable, and if used in closed areas they
may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This
will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry
with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or
worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
236
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system. Seat belt assemblies must be re-
placed after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or deco-
rated surfaces of the interior may cause
permanent damage. Wipe away immedi-
ately.
CAUTION!
• Damage caused by these type of prod-
ucts may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean
damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp
cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily
with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care
should be taken to avoid soaking your leather
upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, de-
tergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to main-
tain the original condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends
to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric
dye transfer more so than darker colors. The
leather is designed for easy cleaning, and
FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based
and/or Ketone based cleaning products to
clean leather seats, as damage to the seat
may result.
237
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or
any commercial household-type glass
cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or
windows equipped with radio antennas. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are
using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the
mirror.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
238
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER..................240
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ............241
Torque Specifications ...........241
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........241
2.4L And 3.2L Engines ..........241
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ....................242
Materials Added To Fuel .........242
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE
ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED .......242
E-85 General Information .........242
FLUID CAPACITIES ..........243
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.....243
Engine.....................243
Chassis ....................244
MOPARACCESSORIES .......245
Authentic Accessories By Mopar .....245
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
239
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is
found on the left front corner of the instru-
ment panel. The VIN is visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield. The VIN
number also is stamped into the right front
body, on the right front seat cross member.
With the seat in the rear most position a flap
in the carpet can be cut open and lifted to
reveal the VIN. It also appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed
to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration, and the title.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left
hand side of the engine block.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VIN Location Right Front Body VIN Location
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
240
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re-
moved and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug
nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality
six sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
M12x1.25 19mm
**Use only an authorized dealer recom-
mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove
any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion
or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern
until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the
lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/
bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/
bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure
WARNING!
to follow this warning may result in per-
sonal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L And 3.2L Engines
These engines are de-
signed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and
provide optimum fuel
economy and perfor-
mance when using high
quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline hav-
ing a posted octane number of 87 as speci-
fied by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not re-
quired, as it will not provide any benefit over
“Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a
Torque Pattern
RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING
(R+M)/2 METHOD
87
241
heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num-
ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita-
tions. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled
with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or
all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level
of detergents to fur-
ther aide in minimiz-
ing engine and fuel
system deposits. When
available, the usage of
Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish re-
moval may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gas-
ket and diaphragm materials.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L
ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for
Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles
can be identified by a unique fuel filler door
label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and/or a yellow fuel cap. Refer
to the Owner’s Manual for further
information.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door
label or a yellow gas cap can operate on
E-85.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
242
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.2L Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
3.2 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
3.2 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 3.2L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
243
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engines 87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L and 3.2L Engines 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze)
other than specified Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze), may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
CAUTION!
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or an-
CAUTION!
tirust products, as they may not be com-
patible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for
use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene
glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid
is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
244
MOPAR ACCESSORIES
Authentic Accessories By Mopar
• The following highlights just some of the
many Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar
featuring a fit, finish, and functionality spe-
cifically for your Jeep Cherokee.
• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain
far more than expressive style, premium
protection, or extreme entertainment, you
also benefit from enhancing your vehicle
with accessories that have been thoroughly
tested and factory-approved.
• For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accesso-
ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership or
online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and
mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
JEEP CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:
• Off Road Kit • Roadside Safety Kit • Cooler
• First Aid Kit • Collapsible Tote • Cargo Area Cover
EXTERIOR:
• Rock Rails • Front End Cover • Hood Decal
• Wheels • Splash Guards • Skid Plates
• Wheel Locks • Locking Gas Cap • Spare Tire Kit
• License Plate Frames • Side Window Air Deflectors • Camping Tent
• Valve Stem Caps • Vehicle Cover
INTERIOR:
• Premium Floor Mats • Emergency Roadside Kit • Molded Cargo Tray
• Security Cover • Bright Pedal Kit • Katzkin Leather Interiors
• All-Weather Mats • Door Sill Guards • Carpet Cargo Mat
245
ELECTRONICS:
• Mopar Web (WiFi) • Speaker Upgrades • Electronic Vehicle Tracking System
• Remote Start • Rear View Camera
CARRIERS:
• Hitch-mount Bike Carrier • Sport Utility Bars • Roof-mount Bike Carrier
• Roof Top Cargo Basket • Roof-mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier • Roof Cargo Box Carrier
• Hitch Receiver • Roof-Mount Canoe Carrier
• Roof-Mount Kayak Carrier • Roof-Mount Surfboard Carrier
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
246
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY ...........249
TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL
INFORMATION .............250
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......250
Reception Conditions ............250
Care And Maintenance ...........250
Anti-Theft Protection ............250
UCONNECT ACCESS .........251
Uconnect Access — If Equipped
(Available On Uconnect 3C/3C NAV —
U.S. Residents Only) ............251
Uconnect Access Registration
(Uconnect 3C/3C NAV, U.S.
48 Contiguous States, Alaska And
Hawaii) ....................252
Download The Uconnect App .......253
Vehicle Finder ................253
Send ‘N Go ..................254
Renewing Subscriptions And
Purchasing 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot (Uconnect
3C/3C NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States,
Alaska And Hawaii) .............255
Getting Started With Apps ........255
Maintaining Your Uconnect Access
Account ....................256
Built-In Features ..............256
Vehicle Health Report/Alert ........259
Uconnect Access Remote Features . . .259
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH
DISPLAY ..................262
Controls On The Front Panel .......262
Clock Setting.................263
Equalizer, Balance And Fade .......263
Radio Mode..................264
Media Mode .................265
Bluetooth Source ..............267
UCONNECT 3C/3C NAV.......268
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV At A Glance . . .268
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ...........270
Radio Mode..................270
Media Mode .................271
UCONNECT SETTINGS ........271
IPOD/USB/SD CARD/MEDIA
PLAYERCONTROL ..........272
Audio Jack (AUX) ..............272
USB Port ...................272
SD Card ....................273
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ........273
NAVIGATION...............273
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume ....................273
Finding Points Of Interest .........274
Finding A Place By Spelling The
Name .....................274
One-Step Voice Destination Entry . . . .274
Setting Your Home Location........274
Go Home ...................275
Adding A Stop ................275
Taking A Detour ...............275
UCONNECT PHONE .........276
Operation ...................276
Uconnect Phone Features .........278
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands
Free Calling) .................278
MULTIMEDIA
247
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect
System ....................278
Common Phone Commands
(Examples) ..................282
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone
During Call ..................282
Transfer Ongoing Call Between
Handset And Vehicle ............282
Phonebook ..................282
Voice Command Tips ............282
Changing The Volume ...........282
Using Do Not Disturb ...........283
Incoming Text Messages .........283
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible
With iPhone) ................284
Helpful Tips And Common Questions
To Improve Bluetooth Performance
With Your Uconnect System ........285
General Information.............286
UCONNECT VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . .286
Introducing Uconnect ...........286
Get Started .................287
Basic Voice Commands...........288
Radio .....................289
Media .....................289
Phone .....................290
Voice Text Reply ..............291
Climate (3C/3C NAV) ...........291
Navigation (3C/3C NAV) ..........292
Uconnect Access — If Equipped
(3C/3C NAV) .................292
Register (3C/3C NAV)............293
Vehicle Health Alert.............294
Mobile App (3C/3C NAV)..........294
Voice Texting (3C/3C NAV).........294
Yelp (3C/3C NAV) ..............295
SiriusXM Travel Link (3C NAV) ......295
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped .......296
Do Not Disturb................297
General Information.............298
Additional Information ...........298
MULTIMEDIA
248
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wire-
less networks. These networks allow your ve-
hicle to send and receive information. This
information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of unau-
thorized and unlawful access to vehicle sys-
tems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its sup-
pliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps
as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and perfor-
mance of your systems or to reduce the po-
tential risk of unauthorized and unlawful ac-
cess to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if
the most recent version of vehicle software
(such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all
of the possible outcomes if your vehi-
cle’s systems are breached. It may be
possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card,
or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious soft-
ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to
your nearest authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
–
Routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com/
support/software-update.html
(U.S.
Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communi-
cations cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Onboard Diag-
nostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in
your Owner’s Manual.
249
TIPS CONTROLS AND
GENERAL INFORMATION
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The steering wheel audio controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for
the next listenable station or select the next
or previous CD track.
• Push the button in the center to select the
next preset station (radio) or to change CDs
if equipped with a CD Player.
Right Switch
• Push the switch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/CD/SXM.
Reception Conditions
Reception conditions change constantly
while driving. Reception may be interfered
with by the presence of mountains, buildings
or bridges, especially when you are far away
from the broadcaster.
The volume may be increased when receiving
traffic alerts and news.
Care And Maintenance
Observe the following precautions to ensure
the system is fully operational:
• The display lens should not come into con-
tact with pointed or rigid objects which
could damage its surface; use a soft, dry
anti-static cloth to clean and do not press.
• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to
clean the display lens.
• Prevent any liquid from entering the sys-
tem: this could damage it beyond repair.
Anti-Theft Protection
The system is equipped with an anti-theft
protection system based on the exchange of
information with the electronic control unit
(Body Computer) on the vehicle.
This guarantees maximum safety and pre-
vents the secret code from being entered
after the power supply has been discon-
nected.
If the check has a positive outcome, the
system will start to operate, whereas if the
comparison codes are not the same or if the
electronic control unit (Body Computer) is
replaced, the system will ask the user to enter
the secret code. See an authorized dealer for
further information.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
MULTIMEDIA
250
UCONNECT ACCESS
Uconnect Access — If Equipped (Available
On Uconnect 3C/3C NAV — U.S.
Residents Only)
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. Some Uconnect Access
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will
NOT work without an operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Uconnect Access enhances your ownership
and driving experience by connecting your
vehicle to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G
(data) network. When connected to an oper-
able 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network, you
can:
• Place a call to a local 9-1-1 Operator for
emergency assistance.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using
the Uconnect App from your device. You
can also do so by logging into your owner
site, or by calling Uconnect Access Care
when your vehicle has an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connec-
tion. Services can only be used where cov-
erage is available; see coverage map for
details.
• Turn your vehicle into a 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot
and connect your devices to the internet.
• Receive text or email notifications if your
vehicle's security alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using
GPS technology to help authorities locate
your vehicle if it is stolen.
• Listen to your text messages or send free-
form text messages with your voice while
keeping your hands on the wheel, using the
Voice Texting feature. Requires a device
that supports Bluetooth Message Access
Profile (MAP).
• Search for places to eat, shop, relax and
play with Yelp, using your voice or on-
screen menu. Then navigate to them (navi-
gation standard on Uconnect 3C NAV, op-
tional on Uconnect 3C).
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST
button on your interior rearview mirror.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect Access services.
1. The ASSIST and 9-1-1 buttons are lo-
cated on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST
button is used for contacting Roadside
Assistance, Vehicle Care and Uconnect
Access Care. The 9-1-1 button connects
you to emergency services.
251
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO
NOT have 9-1-1 call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in
Canada and Mexico may not answer or
respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
2. The Uconnect “Apps
” button is lo-
cated in the center of the menu bar of the
radio touchscreen. This is where you can
manage your Apps and purchase 3G Wi-Fi
on demand.
3. The Uconnect Voice Command and
Uconnect Phone buttons are located on
the left side of your steering wheel. These
buttons let you use your voice to give
commands, make phone calls, send and
receive text messages hands-free, enter
navigation destinations, and control your
radio and media devices.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the Uconnect Access
Services starting at the date of vehicle pur-
chase (date based on vehicle sales notifica-
tion from your dealer). To activate the trial, you
must first register with Uconnect Access. After
the trial period, if you wish to continue your
Uconnect Access Services you can choose to
purchase a subscription.
Uconnect Access Subscription
• After the trial period, you can subscribe by
pushing the ASSIST button on the rear-
view mirror and speaking with a Uconnect
Access Care agent or by visiting the owner
site www.mopar.com. If you need assis-
tance, U.S. residents can call Uconnect
Access Care at 1-855-792-4241.
• For the latest information on packages and
pricing information visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian residents).
Uconnect Access Registration (Uconnect
3C/3C NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States,
Alaska And Hawaii)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Ac-
cess in your vehicle, you first need to register
with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the
touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will regis-
ter your vehicle and handle all of the
details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps
above. Or, press the “Apps
” button on
the touchscreen, then select the Uconnect
registration app to “Register By Web” and
complete the process using your device or
computer.
ASSIST Button
MULTIMEDIA
252
Why sign up for Uconnect Access? Here are
just a few examples of things you’ll be able to
do:
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a
button press away.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from
hundreds of miles away.
• Discover great, new places around you us-
ing Yelp.
• Dictate and send text messages by speak-
ing out loud (all while keeping both hands
on the wheel!)
For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian residents).
Download The Uconnect App
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and playing your favorite
music in your vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your Uconnect
Access services, download the Uconnect
app to your mobile device. Use your Owner
Account login and password to open the
app.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can
begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Re-
mote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn
and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to
your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send ‘n Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the up-
per left corner of the app to bring up app
settings.
Vehicle Finder
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect
Mobile App allows you to find the location of
your vehicle when you have lost it. You can
also sound the alarm and flash the lights to
make finding your vehicle even easier.
To find your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the
location of your vehicle.
Mobile App
253
3. Select the “Find Route” button that ap-
pears, once your vehicle is located.
Select your preferred Navigation App to
route a path to your vehicle.
Send ‘N Go
The Send ‘n Go feature of the Uconnect
Mobile App allows you to search for a desti-
nation on your mobile device and then send
the route to your vehicle’s built-in navigation
system.
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Either type in the destination you would
like to navigate to, or search through one
of the categories provided.
3. Select the destination you want to route to
from the list that appears.
Vehicle Icon
Find Route Button
Destination Search Bar
MULTIMEDIA
254
4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and
then confirm the destination by pressing
“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the
Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.
5. Finally, confirm the route inside your ve-
hicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on
the pop-up that appears on the touch-
screen, when the vehicle is started.
Renewing Subscriptions And Purchasing
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot (Uconnect 3C/3C NAV,
U.S. 48 Contiguous States, Alaska And
Hawaii)
Subscriptions, and 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot, can be
purchased from the Uconnect Store within
your vehicle, and online at Mopar Owner
Connect. If you need help push the ASSIST
button on the rearview mirror, then select
Uconnect Care (or dial 1-855-792-4241).
NOTE:
You must set up a Uconnect Access Payment
Account online (login to www.mopar.com, go
to Edit Profile, then Uconnect Payment Ac-
count, to set up and manage your Payment
Account).
Getting Started With Apps
Applications (Apps for short) in your
Uconnect Access system are designed to de-
liver the features and services that you want.
The types of apps you can use with Uconnect
Access are:
• Built-In Features — use the 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network on your Uconnect 3C
or 3C NAV radio.
Apps Main Menu
Press the “Apps ” button on the touch-
screen to open the Apps main menu, in this
screen you will be able to access all of your
available Apps. To access an App directly,
press the corresponding button on the touch-
screen and you will be directed to that App.
To view the rest our your Apps, press the page
forward or page back button.
Send To Vehicle Button
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV Main Menu
255
App Manager
Press the “App Manager” button to access
the following categories:
Favorite Apps
This is the default screen when you first press
the “App Manager” button on the touch-
screen, and is a good place to put the apps
you use most frequently. To make an App a
“favorite”, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen to the right of the App.
All Apps
All of your available Apps will reside in the
“All Apps” folder.
Running Apps
Press this tab to see which apps are currently
running.
Maintaining Your Uconnect Access
Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend
that you remove your Uconnect Access Ac-
count information from the vehicle. You can
do this on the Mopar website
www.mopar.com. Removing your account in-
formation cancels your subscription and
makes your vehicle factory-ready for a new
owner/subscriber.
For additional information on Uconnect, visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian residents) or
call 1-877-855-8400.
Built-In Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. Some Uconnect Access
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist,
WARNING!
will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network con-
nection.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could
mean you may not have 9-1-1 Call ser-
vice if needed. If the rearview mirror
light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system
immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light on the instrument panel if a mal-
function is detected in any part of the
airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, the air bag system
may not be working properly and the
9-1-1 system may not send a signal to a
9-1-1 operator if an air bag is deployed.
If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service
your vehicle immediately.
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in
danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible,
dangerous road conditions or location),
do not wait for voice contact from a
MULTIMEDIA
256
WARNING!
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move
to a safe location.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into
the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not
add aftermarket electrical equipment to
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a sig-
nal to initiate an emergency call. To
avoid interference that can cause the
9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder,
etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system
or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUD-
ING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), the Uconnect features, apps and
services, among others, will not operate.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
• Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system for any of the in vehicle Uconnect
features to operate.
Assist Call (3C/3C NAV)
The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST push
button, and the touchscreen contains a
Uconnect App, which will automatically connect
the vehicle occupants to one of these predefined
destinations for immediate support:
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a flat
tire, or need a tow, you’ll be connected to
someone who can help anytime. Additional
fees may apply. Additional information in
this section.
• Uconnect Access Care — In vehicle support
for Uconnect Access System, Apps and
Features.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your FCA
US LLC vehicle.
Emergency 9-1-1 Call (If Equipped)
The rearview mirror contains a 9-1-1 button
that, when pressed, may place a call from
your vehicle to a local 9-1-1 operator to
request help from local police, fire or ambu-
lance personnel. If this button is accidentally
pressed, you will have seven seconds to stop
the call. To cancel, press the 9-1-1 Call
button again or press the “Cancel” button
shown on the touchscreen. After seven sec-
onds has passed, the 9-1-1 call will be
placed and only the 9-1-1 operator can can-
cel it. The LED light on the rearview mirror
will turn green once a connection to a 9-1-1
operator has been made. The green LED light
will turn off once the 9-1-1 call is terminated.
9-1-1 Button And ASSIST
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — 911 Button
257
Have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
if the rearview mirror light is continuously
red. On equipped vehicles, this feature re-
quires a functioning electrical system and an
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network
connection to function properly. If a connec-
tion is made between a 9-1-1 operator and your
vehicle, you understand and agree that 9-1-1
operators may, like any other 9-1-1 call, record
conversations and sounds in and near your
vehicle upon connection.
Roadside Assistance (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature
and has an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G
(data) network connection, you may be able
to connect with Roadside Assistance by
pushing the "ASSIST" button on the rearview
mirror. You will be presented with Assist Care
options. Make a selection by pressing the
prompts displayed on the radio. If Roadside
Assistance is provided to your vehicle, you
agree to be responsible for any additional
roadside assistance service costs that you
may incur. In order to provide Uconnect Ser-
vices to you, we may record and monitor your
conversations with Roadside Assistance,
Uconnect Care or Vehicle Care, whether such
conversations are initiated through the
Uconnect Services in your vehicle, your de-
vice or via a landline device, and may share
information obtained through such recording
and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
requirements. You acknowledge, agree and
consent to any recording, monitoring or shar-
ing of information obtained through any such
call recordings.
Yelp
Customers have the ability to search for
nearby destinations or a Point Of Interest
(POI) either by category or custom search by
using keywords (for example, “Italian restau-
rant”). Searching can be done by either voice
or by using the touchscreen keypad. Using
the touchscreen, launch Yelp by selecting the
“Apps
” icon, then press “Yelp.” To use
voice recognition, push the VR button on the
steering wheel and say “launch Yelp,” then
follow the instructions on the Teleprompter.
Security Alarm Notification
The Theft Alarm Notification feature notifies
you via email or text (SMS) message when the
vehicle’s factory-installed security alarm sys-
tem has been set-off. There are a number of
reasons why your alarm may have been trig-
gered, one of which could be that your ve-
hicle was stolen. If so, please see the details
of the Stolen Vehicle Assistance service be-
low. When you register, Theft Alarm Notifica-
tion is automatically set to send you an email
at the email address you provide should the
alarm go off. You may also opt to have a text
message sent to your device.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement immediately to file a stolen ve-
hicle report. Once this report has been filed,
Uconnect care can help locate your vehicle.
The Uconnect Care agent will ask for the
stolen vehicle report number issued by local
law enforcement. As long as your vehicle has
an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data)
network connection, the Uconnect Care
Agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle
and work with law enforcement to help re-
MULTIMEDIA
258
cover it. Your vehicle must have an operable
1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connec-
tion and must be registered with Uconnect
Access with an active subscription that in-
cludes the applicable feature.
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle feature that
connects your device to an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network using
Uconnect Access and is ready to go where
ever you are. Once your vehicle is registered
for Uconnect Access, you can purchase a 3G
Wi-Fi Hotspot subscription at the Uconnect
Store. After you've made your purchase, turn
on your signal and connect your passengers’
devices. It's never been easier to bring your
home or office with you.
WARNING!
NEVER use the 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot when
you are driving the vehicle. As the driver,
you should only use the 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot
when the vehicle is parked in a safe loca-
tion. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email
report, which summarizes the performance of
your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs.
Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health
Alerts when it detects issues with its key
systems that need your attention. For further
information, go to the Mopar Owner Connect
website at www.mopar.com.
Uconnect Access Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android
powered device, the Uconnect App allows
you to remotely lock or unlock your doors,
start your engine or activate your horn and
lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle
must be equipped with remote start and your
vehicle must have an operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G (data) network connection). Ser-
vices can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details. You
can download the App from Mopar Owner
Connect or from the App Store (iPhone) or
Google Play Store (Android). Visit
UconnectPhone.com to determine if your de-
vice is compatible. For Uconnect Phone cus-
tomer support and to determine if your device
is compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400.
Remote Start — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to start the
engine on your vehicle, without the keys and
from virtually any distance. You can send a
request to your vehicle in one of two ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-
ible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not en-
tered your vehicle with the key, the
engine will shut off automatically.
•
You can also send a command to turn-off
an engine that has been remote started.
• This remote function requires your ve-
hicle to be equipped with a factory-
installed Remote Start system. To uti-
lize this feature after the Uconnect App
259
is downloaded, login with your user
name and password.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit
Uconnect Security PIN to confirm the re-
quest. Press the “remote start” icon on your
Uconnect App to remotely start the vehicle.
You can set-up notifications for your account
to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to
Mopar Owner Connect at www.mopar.com
and click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect
Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
This feature provides the ability to lock or unlock
the door on your vehicle, without the keys and
from virtually any distance. You can send a
request to your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-
ible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the Uconnect Care on the
phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit
Uconnect Security PIN to confirm the request.
Press the “closed lock” icon on your Uconnect
App to lock the doors, and press the “open
lock” icon to unlock the driver’s door.
You can set-up notifications for your account
to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to
Mopar Owner Connect at www.mopar.com
and click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect
Notifications.
Remote Horn And Lights
It’s easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded
or noisy parking area by activating the horn
and lights. It may also help if you need to
draw attention to your vehicle for any reason.
You can send a request to your vehicle in one
of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-
ible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the Uconnect Care on the
phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit
Uconnect Security PIN to confirm the re-
quest. You can set-up notifications for your
account to receive an email or text (SMS)
message every time a command is sent.
Login to Mopar at www.mopar.com and click
on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect Notifica-
tions.
Voice Texting
Want to dictate a personal message? Register
with Uconnect Access to take advantage of a
new, cloudbased Voice Texting service, an
enhancement to Voice Text Reply.
Voice Texting allows you to compose a new text
or reply to an incoming text message. Before
you attempt to use the Voice Texting feature,
check to ensure you have the following:
1. A paired, Bluetooth enabled device with
the Message Access Profile (MAP). Not all
Bluetooth enabled devices support MAP,
including all iPhones (Apple iOS). Visit
UconnectPhone.com for system and de-
vice compatibility information.
MULTIMEDIA
260
2. An active Uconnect Access trial or paid
subscription.
3. Accept the “Allow MAP” profile request
on your device. (Please refer to device
manufacturer instructions for details).
To Send A Text Message
1. Push the Uconnect Phone Button
on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the beep.
3. Say “Text.”
4.
Uconnect will prompt you “Say the phone
number, or full name and phone type of the
contact you want to send a message to.”
5. Wait for the beep and say a contact that is
in your phonebook, or a mobile phone
number that you would like to send the
message to.
6. Uconnect will prompt you “Please say the
message that you would like to send.” (If
you do not hear this prompt, you may not
have an active subscription with
Uconnect Access).
7. Wait for the beep, and then dictate any
message up to 140 characters. If you
exceed 140 characters, you will hear the
following prompt: “Message was too long;
your message will be truncated.”
8. Uconnect will then repeat the message
back to you.
9. Uconnect will prompt you: “To add to your
message, say “Continue”; To delete the
current message and start over, say “Start
Over”; to send the current message, say
“Send”; to hear the message again, say
“Repeat”.
10. If you are happy with your message and
would like to send it, wait for the beep
and say “Send”.
11. Uconnect will then say “Sending your
message.”
Sample Commands For Voice Text Reply And Voice Texting
Example Command Action
“Text John Smith” Send a message to specific contact in address book
“Text 123 456 7890” Send 123 456 7890 a message from your phonebook
“Show messages” See recent text messages listed by number on Uconnect screen
“Listen to/view (message number four, for example)” Hear messages or read it on Uconnect screen
“Reply” Send a voice text reply to a current message
“Forward text/message to “John Smith” Forward current text to specific contact in address book
“Forward text/message to “123 456 7890” Forward current text to specific phone number
261
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH
DISPLAY
Controls On The Front Panel
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio
1 — RADIO Button
2 — COMPASS Button
3 — CLIMATE Button
4 — MORE Functions Button
5 — Uconnect PHONE Button
6 — MEDIA Button
MULTIMEDIA
262
Clock Setting
To start the clock setting procedure:
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate.
Next press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen and then press the “Clock
and Date” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Set Time” button on the
touchscreen.
3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust
the hours or minutes, next select the
“AM” or “PM” button on the touchscreen.
You can also select 12hr or 24hr format by
pressing the desired button on the
touchscreen.
4. Once the time is set press the “Done”
button on the touchscreen to exit the time
screen.
NOTE:
In the Clock Setting Menu you can also select
the “Show Time Status” button on the touch-
screen, then select from “On” or “Off” to
display the time in the status bar.
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate.
Next press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen.
2. Then scroll down and press the “Audio”
button on the touchscreen to get to the
Audio menu.
3. The Audio Menu shows the following op-
tions for you to customize your audio
settings.
Equalizer
Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble.
Use the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen
to adjust the equalizer to your desired set-
tings. Press the “Back Arrow” button on the
touchscreen when done.
Balance/Fade
Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to adjust the sound from the
speakers. Use the arrow button on the touch-
screen to adjust the sound level from the
front and rear or right and left side speakers.
Press the Center “C” button on the touch-
screen to reset the balance and fade to the
factory setting. Press the “Back Arrow” but-
ton on the touchscreen when done.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to select between OFF, 1,
2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume
relative to a decrease in vehicle speed. Press
the “Back Arrow” button on the touchscreen
when done.
Loudness
Press the “Loudness” button on the touch-
screen to select the Loudness feature. When
this feature is activated it improves sound
quality at lower volumes.
Surround Sound
Press the “Surround Sound” button on the
touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed
by pressing the “Back Arrow” button on the
touchscreen. When this feature is activated,
it provides simulated surround sound mode.
263
Radio Mode Seek Previous/Next Buttons
Seek Up
Press and release the “Seek Up” button
on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the
next listenable station or channel.
During a Seek Up function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing
through the entire band two times, the radio
will stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the “Seek Up” button on
the touchscreen to advance the radio through
the available stations or channels at a faster
rate, the radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
Seek Down
Press and release the “Seek Down” but-
ton on the touchscreen to tune the radio to
the next listenable station or channel.
During a Seek Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing
through the entire band two times, the radio
will stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the “Seek Down” button
on the touchscreen to advance the radio
through the available stations or channel at a
faster rate, the radio stops at the next avail-
able station or channel when the button on
the touchscreen is released.
Store Radio Presets
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of
the Radio modes. There are four visible pre-
sets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing
the “All” button on the touchscreen on the
radio home screen will display all of the
preset stations for that mode.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-
ton on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio
1 — Radio Sta-
tion Presets
2 — Show All
Presets
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio Set-
tings
5 — Station
Info
6 — Direct
Tune
7 — Radio
Band
8 — Seek Down
MULTIMEDIA
264
Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Media Mode is entered by pushing the ME-
DIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the “Source” button on
the touchscreen and the desired mode button
on the touchscreen. Disc (if equipped), USB,
AUX, and Bluetooth (if equipped), are the
Media sources available. When available, you
can select the “Browse” button on the touch-
screen to be given these options:
• Now Playing
• Artists
• Albums
• Genres
• Songs
• Playlists
• Folders
Source
Press the “Source” button on the touch-
screen to select the desired audio source:
Disc (if equipped), USB, AUX and Bluetooth
(if equipped). This screen will time out after a
few seconds and return to the main radio
screen if no selection is made.
You can press the “Source,” “Pause/Play” or
the “Info” button on the touchscreen for
artist information on the current song play-
ing.
Disc Mode — If Equipped
Your vehicle may have a remote Disc player
located in the center console storage bin.
Disc Mode is entered by either inserting a
CD/Disc or by pushing the MEDIA button on
the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the
“Source” button on the touchscreen and se-
lect “Disc.”
Inserting Compact Disc
Gently insert one disc into the disc player
with the disc label following the illustration
indicated on the player. The disc automati-
cally pulls into the disc player and the disc
icon illuminates on the radio display. If a disc
does not go into the slot more than 1 inch
(2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and
must be ejected before a new disc can be
loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and
the radio ON, the unit will switch to disc
mode and begin to play when you insert the
disc. The display will show the track number
and index time in minutes and seconds. Play
will begin at the start of track one.
Uconnect Media Mode
1 — SEEK
Down
2 — SEEK Up
3 — Additional
Functions
4 — Info
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Source
7 — Browse
265
Browse
Press the “Browse” button on the touch-
screen to scroll through and select a desired
track on the Disc. Press the “Exit” button on
the touchscreen if you wish to cancel the
browse function.
Eject Button — Ejecting a Disc
Push the eject button to eject the disc. If you
have ejected a disc and have not removed it
within ten seconds, it will be reloaded. If the
Disc is not removed, the radio will reinsert
the disc but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and
ignition OFF.
USB/iPod Mode
USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB Jump Drive or iPod cable into the USB
port, or by pushing the MEDIA button located
on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press
the “Source” button on the touchscreen and
select “USB/iPod.”
Inserting USB/iPod Device
Gently insert the USB/iPod device into the
USB Port. If you insert a USB/iPod device
with the ignition ON, the unit will switch to
USB/iPod mode and begin to play when you
insert the device. The display will show the
track number and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
Browse
Press the “Browse” button on the touch-
screen to select Artist, Albums, Genres,
Songs, Playlists or Folders from the USB/
iPod device. Once the desired selection is
made you can chose from the available media
by pressing the button on the touchscreen.
Press the “Exit” button on the touchscreen if
you wish to cancel the browse function.
AUX Mode
AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX
device using a stereo cable with a 3.5 mm
audio jack into the AUX port, or by pushing
the MEDIA button located on the faceplate.
Once in Media Mode, press the “Source”
button on the touchscreen and select “AUX.”
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into
the AUX Port. If you insert a Auxiliary device
with the ignition ON, the unit will switch to
AUX mode and begin to play when you insert
the device cable.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., se-
lecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) can-
not be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob, or with the vol-
ume of the attached device.
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for
audio output from the Auxiliary device.
Therefore if the volume control on the Auxil-
iary device is set too low, there will be insuf-
ficient audio signal for the radio unit to play
the music on the device.
Track Selection
Seek Up
/Seek Down
Press and release the “Right Arrow” but-
ton on the touchscreen for the next selection.
Press and release the “Left Arrow”
button
MULTIMEDIA
266
on the touchscreen to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the Disc
is within the first second of the current selec-
tion.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the “Right Arrow” button
on the touchscreen and the desired mode will
begin to fast forward through the current
track until the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the “Left Arrow”
button
on the touchscreen and the desired mode will
begin to rewind through the current track
until the button on the touchscreen is re-
leased.
Info
Press the “Info” button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press
the “X” button on the touchscreen to cancel
this feature.
Shuffle
Press the “Shuffle” button on the touch-
screen to play the selections on the USB/iPod
device in random order to provide an interest-
ing change of pace. Press the “Shuffle” but-
ton on the touchscreen a second time to turn
this feature off.
Repeat
Press the “Repeat” button on the touch-
screen to repeat the song selection. To cancel
repeat, press the “Repeat” button on the
touchscreen a second time.
Bluetooth Source
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) or
Bluetooth Mode is entered by pairing a
Bluetooth device containing music to the
Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth device
must be paired with the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
See the “Pairing Procedure” in this manual
for further details.
Once the Bluetooth device is paired to the
Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate. Once in Media
Mode, press the “Source” button on the
touchscreen and select “Bluetooth.”
NOTE:
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing in-
structions, please visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Pairing A Bluetooth Audio Device
To begin using your audio device, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled au-
dio device. Pairing is the process of establish-
ing a wireless connection between a device
and the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth enabled on your
device to complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
267
2. Push the PHONE button on the faceplate.
• If there is no devices currently con-
nected with the system, a pop-up will
appear asking if you would like to pair a
device.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled device.
• Select Bluetooth and ensure it is en-
abled. Once enabled, the device will
begin to search for Bluetooth
connections.
5. If No is selected, and you still would like
to pair a device, press the “Settings”
button from the Uconnect Phone main
screen.
• Select “Paired Phones” then press the
“Add Device” button on the touch-
screen.
• Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled device (see below).
When prompted on the device, select
“Uconnect” and accept the connection
request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in prog-
ress screen while the system is
connecting.
7. When your device finds the Uconnect sys-
tem, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the device, accept the
connection request from Uconnect
Phone.
NOTE:
Some devices will require you to enter the
PIN number.
9. When the pairing process has success-
fully completed, the system will prompt
you to choose whether or not this is your
favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make
this device the highest priority. This de-
vice will take precedence over other
paired devices within range and will con-
nect to the Uconnect system automati-
cally when entering the vehicle. Only one
Bluetooth device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from
the device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
UCONNECT 3C/3C NAV
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV At A Glance
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
Uconnect 3C NAV Radio Screen
MULTIMEDIA
268
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touch-
screen, doing so can result in damage to
the screen.
Setting The Time
• Model 3C NAV synchronizes time automati-
cally via GPS, so it should not require any
time adjustment. If you do need to set the
time manually, follow the instructions be-
low for Model 3C.
• For Model 3C, turn the unit on, then press
the time display at the top of the screen.
Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press
the “Clock” button on the touchscreen,
then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out
of the Clock Setting screen.
Background Themes
• Screen background themes are selectable
from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d
like to set a theme, follow the instructions
below.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen.
• Press the “Display” button on the touch-
screen.
• Then press “Set Theme” button on the
touchscreen and select a theme.
Audio Settings
• Press of the “Audio” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Audio settings screen
to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and
Speed Adjusted Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between
the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-
screen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus
nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of
the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted
269
Volume is adjusted by pressing the volume
level indicator. This alters the automatic ad-
justment of the audio volume with variation
to vehicle speed.
Drag&DropMenuBar
The Uconnect features and services in the
main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the
App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected
App to replace an existing shortcut in the
main menu bar.
The replaced shortcut will now be an active
App/shortcut on the main menu bar.
Radio Mode
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio”
button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or
SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once
the arrow button on the touchscreen is
released.
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV Main Menu
Uconnect 3C NAV Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — View Small Navigation Map
5 — Main Category Bar
6 — Audio Settings
7 — Seek Up
8 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
9 — Seek Down
10 — Browse And Manage Presets
11 — Radio Bands
MULTIMEDIA
270
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing
the “Tune” button on the screen, and en-
tering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To
see the 12 preset stations per band, press the
arrow button on the touchscreen at the top
right of the screen to toggle between the two
sets of six presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-
ton on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
HD Radio
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 3C NAV)
operates similar to conventional radio ex-
cept it allows broadcasters to transmit a
high-quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is
provided with a clear sound that enhances
the listening experience. HD radio can also
transmit data such as song title or artist.
Media Mode
The controls are accessed by pressing the
desired button on the touchscreen and
choosing between Disc, AUX, USB,
Bluetooth or SD Card.
NOTE:
Uconnect will automatically switch to the
appropriate mode when something is first
connected or inserted into the system.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system allows you to access
Customer Programmable feature settings
such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driv-
ing Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Com-
pass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth,
SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Per-
sonal Data, and System Information through
buttons on the touchscreen.
Push the SETTINGS button (Uconnect 3), or
press the “Apps” button (Uconnect 3C/3C
NAV) located near the bottom of the touch-
screen, then press the “Settings” button on
the touchscreen to access the Settings
screen. When making a selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is high-
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV Media
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Music Track And Time
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks
4 — Music Track Information
5 — Show Songs Currently In Cue To
Be Played
6 — Browse Music By
7 — Music Source
271
lighted, then press the preferred setting until
a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. The
following feature settings are available:
• Display • Engine Off Options
• Voice • Audio
• Clock • Phone/Bluetooth
• Safety & Driving As-
sistance
• SiriusXM Setup
• Lights • Restore Settings
• Doors & Locks • Clear Personal Data
• Auto-On Comfort • System Information
•
Compass (Uconnect 3)
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor-
mation.
IPOD/USB/SD CARD/MEDIA
PLAYER CONTROL
There are many ways to play music from
MP3 players, USB devices, or SD Cards
through your vehicle's sound system. Press
your Media button on the touchscreen to
begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device to be plugged into
the radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound
system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touch-
screen will change the mode to auxiliary
device if the audio jack is connected, allow-
ing the music from your device to be heard
through the vehicle's speakers. To activate
the AUX, plug in the audio jack.
• The functions of the device are controlled
using the device buttons. The volume may
be controlled using the radio or device.
USB Port
• Connect your compatible device using a
USB cable into the USB Port. USB Memory
sticks with audio files can also be used.
Audio from the device can be played on the
vehicles sound system while providing
metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
information on the radio display.
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — SD Card Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB Port
MULTIMEDIA
272
• When connected, the compatible USB de-
vice can be controlled using the radio or
Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip
to the next or previous track, browse, and
list the contents.
• The battery charges when plugged into the
USB port (if supported by the specific de-
vice).
• To route the USB cable out of the center
console, use the access cut out.
NOTE:
When connecting your device for the first
time, the system may take several minutes to
read your music, depending on the number of
files. For example, the system will take ap-
proximately five minutes for every
1,000 songs loaded on the device. Also dur-
ing the reading process, the Shuffle and
Browse functions will be disabled. This pro-
cess is needed to ensure the full use of your
features and only happens the first time it is
connected. After the first time, the reading
process of your device will take considerably
less time unless changes are made or new
songs are added to the playlist.
SD Card
• Play songs stored on an SD card inserted
into the SD card slot.
• Song playback can be controlled using the
radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls to
play, skip to the next or previous track,
browse, and list the contents.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
If using a Bluetooth equipped device you may
also be able to stream music to your vehicle's
sound system. Your connected device must
be Bluetooth compatible and paired with your
system (see Uconnect Phone for pairing in-
structions). You can access the music from
your connected Bluetooth device by pressing
the Bluetooth button on the touchscreen
while in Media mode.
NAVIGATION
• The information in the section below is only
applicable if you have the 3C NAV system or
the Navigation has been activated on your
3C system.
• If you have a Uconnect 3C system your
radio is “Navigation-Ready,” and can be
equipped with Navigation at an extra cost.
Please see your dealer for details.
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in
the menu bar to access the Navigation sys-
tem.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume
1. Press the “View Map” button on the
touchscreen from the Nav Main Menu.
2. With the map displayed, press the “Set-
tings” button on the touchscreen in the
lower right area of the screen.
3. In the Settings menu, press the “Guid-
ance” button on the touchscreen.
273
4. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav
Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Points of Interest” button
on the touchscreen.
• Select a Category and then a subcategory, if
necessary.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes”
button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the
“Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “Points of Interest” button on the
touchscreen, then press the “Spell Name”
button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” button on the touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes”
button on the touchscreen.
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
• Enter a navigation destination without tak-
ing your hands off the wheel.
• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command
button on the steering wheel, wait for
the beep and say something like, "Find
Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills
MI."
NOTE:
Destination entry is not available while your
vehicle is in motion. However, you can also
use Voice Commands to enter an address
while moving. Refer to “Uconnect Voice Rec-
ognition Quick Tips” within this chapter for
further information.
Setting Your Home Location
• Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen
in the menu bar to access the Navigation
system and the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then press the “Go Home” button
on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 3C NAV Navigation
1 — Find A Destination
2 — View Map
3 — Information
4 — Emergency
5 — Navigation Settings
6 — Stop A Route
7 — Detour A Route
8 — Repeat Route Guidance Prompt
MULTIMEDIA
274
• You may enter your address directly, use
your current location as your home address,
or choose from recently found locations.
• To delete your Home location (or other
saved locations) so you can save a new
Home location, press the “Where To?” but-
ton on the touchscreen from the Main Navi-
gation menu, then press the “Go Home”
button on the touchscreen, and in the Yes
screen press the “Options” button on the
touchscreen. In the Options menu press the
“Clear Home” button on the touchscreen.
Set a new Home location by following the
previous instructions.
Go Home
• A Home location must be saved in the
system. From the Main Navigation menu,
press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then press the “Go Home” button
on the touchscreen.
Your route is marked with a blue line on the
map. If you depart from the original route,
your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon
could appear as you travel on major roadways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a
route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touch-
screen to return to the Main Navigation
menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then search for the extra stop.
When another location has been selected,
you can choose to cancel your previous
route, add as the first destination or add as
the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the
“Yes” button on the touchscreen.
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a
route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only
reasonable option, the device may not calcu-
late a detour. For more information, see your
Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.
Uconnect 3C NAV Map
1 — Distance To Next Turn
2 — Next Turn Street
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival
4 — Zoom In And Out
5 — Your Location On The Map
6 — Navigation Main Menu
7 — Current Street Location
8 — Navigation Routing Options
275
UCONNECT PHONE
Operation
NOTE:
The Browse Phone Book button contains 9-1-1
Uconnect 3 Phone Menu
1 — Call/Redial/Hold
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book
12 — End Call
MULTIMEDIA
276
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV Phone Menu
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Manage Paired Mobile Phones
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply with Text Message
*—
Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (re-
quires Bluetooth MAP profile)
277
NOTE:
The Browse Phone Book Entries button con-
tains 9-1-1.
Uconnect Phone Features
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to
place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone
calls using their voice or by using the buttons
on the touchscreen (see Voice Command sec-
tion).
The hands-free calling feature is made pos-
sible through Bluetooth technology — the
global standard that enables different elec-
tronic devices to connect to each other wire-
lessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button
exists on
your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile
phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-
Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compat-
ible with the Uconnect system, however
some mobile phones/devices may not be
equipped with all of the required features
to utilize all of the Uconnect system fea-
tures.
• For Uconnect Customer Care: U.S. resi-
dents visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400.
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free
Calling)
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to
place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone
calls using their voice or by using the buttons
on the touchscreen (see Voice Command sec-
tion).
The hands-free calling feature is made pos-
sible through Bluetooth technology — the
global standard that enables different elec-
tronic devices to connect to each other wire-
lessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button
exists on
your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile
phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-
Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compat-
ible with the Uconnect system, however
some mobile phones/devices may not be
equipped with all of the required features
to utilize all of the Uconnect system fea-
tures.
• For Uconnect Customer Care:
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1–877–855–8400.
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
Mobile phone pairing is the process of estab-
lishing a wireless connection between a cel-
lular phone and the Uconnect system.
MULTIMEDIA
278
NOTE:
• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you
first must determine if your mobile phone
and software are compatible with the
Uconnect system. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while
the vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of ten mobile phones can be
paired to the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
Keep in mind that software updates – either
on your phone or Uconnect system – may
interfere with the Bluetooth connection. If
this happens, simply repeat the pairing pro-
cess. However, first, make sure to delete the
device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth settings.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Uconnect 3:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Uconnect 3C, 3C NAV:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar
on the touchscreen.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 3C & 3C NAV
279
Pair Your iPhone
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-
abled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure
1. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mo-
bile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automati-
cally when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
Pairing Request
MULTIMEDIA
280
Pair Your Android Device
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-
abled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth
connections.
5. Once your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
• You may be prompted by your mobile
phone to download the phonebook,
check “Do Not Ask Again” to automati-
cally download the phonebook. This is
so you can make calls by saying the
name of your contact.
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure
1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile
phone matches the passkey shown on the
Uconnect system then accept the
Bluetooth pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to be
entered manually, enter the PIN number
shown on the Uconnect screen.
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority
Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mo-
bile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automati-
cally when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Uconnect Device
Pairing Request
281
You are now ready to make hands-free calls.
Press the Uconnect “Phone” button
on
your steering wheel to begin.
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for ad-
ditional information on mobile phone pairing
and for a list of compatible phones.
Common Phone Commands (Examples)
• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on
the Phone main screen to mute and un-
mute the call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle
• During an on-going call, press the “Trans-
fer” button on the Phone main screen to
transfer an on-going call between handset
and vehicle.
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync
your phonebook from your paired phone, if
this feature is supported by your phone.
Phonebook contacts are updated each time
that the phone is connected. If your phone
book entries do not appear, check the set-
tings on your phone. Some phones require
you to enable this feature manually.
• Your phonebook can be browsed on the
Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing
can only be done on your phone. To browse,
press the “Phone” button on the touch-
screen, then the “Phonebook” button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as
Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are
shown at the top of the main phone screen.
Voice Command Tips
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John
Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater
system accuracy.
• You can “link” commands together for
faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,”
for example.
• If you are listening to available voice com-
mand options, you do not have to listen to
the entire list. When you hear the command
that you need, push the
button on the
steering wheel, wait for the beep and say
your command.
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the Phone
button
, then say a command for
example - "Help".
• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob
to adjust the volume to a comfortable level
while the Uconnect system is speaking.
NOTE:
The volume setting for Uconnect is different
than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the Uconnect Phone
button
on the steering wheel and say
"help." Push the Uconnect Phone Pickup
button
or the VR button and say
"cancel" to cancel the help session.
MULTIMEDIA
282
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi-
cations from incoming calls and texts, allow-
ing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you
were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can
be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming
calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
•
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
Incoming Text Messages
After pairing your Uconnect system with a
Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the
Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect
system can announce a new incoming text
message and read it to you over the vehicle’s
audio system.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle will be deleted from
the Uconnect system when the ignition is
turned to the Off position.
To enable incoming text messaging:
iPhone
1. Press the settings button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the
mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect
system.
3. Select
located under DEVICES next to
Uconnect.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to On.
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
283
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to On.
• A pop up will appear asking you to
accept a request for permission to con-
nect to your messages. Select “Don’t
ask again” and press OK.
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With
iPhone)
NOTE:
Voice texting reply and voice texting features
require a compatible mobile device enabled
with Bluetooth Message Access Profile
(MAP). iPhone, and some other smart-
phones, may not entirely support Bluetooth
MAP. Visit UconnectPhone.com for the latest
system and device compatibility.
•
Due to the extremely large number of mobile
phone manufacturers, your mobile device
may not be listed. For further assistance,
contact Uconnect Customer Care @
1-877-855-8400 for U.S. residents or,
1-800-465-2001
(English) /
1-800-387-9983
(French) for Canadian residents.
Once your Uconnect system is paired with a
compatible mobile device, the system can
announce a new incoming text message, and
read it to you over the vehicle audio system.
You can reply to the message using Voice
Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of
the 18 pre-defined messages.
Enable Android Device Incoming Text
Messages
MULTIMEDIA
284
Here’s How
1. Push the Uconnect Phone button
and wait for the beep, then say “reply.”
Uconnect will give the following prompt:
“Please say the message you would like to
send.”
2. Wait for the beep and say one of the
pre-defined messages. (If you are not
sure, you can say “help”). Uconnect will
then read the pre-defined messages
allowed.
3. As soon as you hear the message you
would like to send, you can interrupt the
list of prompts by pushing the Uconnect
phone button and saying the phrase.
Uconnect will confirm the message by
reading it back to you.
4. Push the Phone button and say “Send.”
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be <5,
10,
15,...etc.>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need direc-
tions.
See you in
<5, 10,
15,...etc.> of
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
NOTE:
To make the SMS voice reading function
available, the SMS notification option on
phone must be enabled; this option is usually
available on the phone, in the Bluetooth
connections menu for a device registered as
Uconnect. After enabling this function on the
mobile phone, it must be disconnected and
reconnected with the Uconnect system in
order to make it effective.
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To
Improve Bluetooth Performance With
Your Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after
pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or
trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth
settings (Blackberry devices).
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile
phone. Refer to your mobile phone manu-
facturer or cellular provider for instruc-
tions.
• Many mobile phones do not automatically
reconnect after being restarted (hard re-
boot). Your mobile phone can still be con-
nected manually. Close all applications that
may be operating (refer to mobile phone
manufacturer’s instructions), and follow
“Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mo-
bile Phone To The Uconnect System”.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by
removing the battery (if removable — see
your mobile phone’s owner manual).
285
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and
Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s
Bluetooth connection settings.
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the
discovered Bluetooth devices on your mo-
bile phone.
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code
the default is 0000.
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“phonebook download” request on your
mobile phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four num-
bers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV system phonebook.
• Up to 2,000 contact names with six num-
bers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 3 system phonebook.
Text messaging won’t work:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“connect to your messages” request on
your mobile phone.
• Verify that your mobile phone has the
Bluetooth feature (Message Access
Profile).
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) car-
riers do not support conference calling.
Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual
for further information.
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while
connected to Bluetooth will disable Hands-
Free Calling. Do not make calls while your
mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
• This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance
requirements, the device much be installed
to provide a separation distance of at least
20 cm (200 mm) from all persons.
UCONNECT VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know
to control your Uconnect 3 or 3C/3C NAV
system.
MULTIMEDIA
286
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen,
you have the Uconnect 3C NAV system. If
not, you have a Uconnect 3C system.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check device
and feature compatibility and to find de-
vice pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and pas-
senger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and vol-
ume while facing straight ahead.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or
Phone button and saying a Voice Com-
mand from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steer-
ing wheel.
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 3C NAV
287
1. Uconnect Phone Button , Push to
initiate, answer, or end a phone call, send
or receive a text.
2. Uconnect Voice Recognition Button
.
a. Short Press: Push and release the VR
button to begin Radio, Climate, Navi-
gation, and other embedded func-
tions. After you hear the single beep,
say a command.
b. Long Press: Push and hold continuously
for a few milliseconds, then release the
VR button for Siri functions. After you
hear the familiar Siri "double beep,"
say a command.
3. Phone Hang Up Button.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be
given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep,
say:
•“Cancel to stop a current voice session”
•“Help to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands”
•“Repeat to listen to the system prompts
again”
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues ap-
pear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons Uconnect 3 Visual Cues
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV
MULTIMEDIA
288
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep,
say:
•“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
•“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and say “Help.” The
system providesyou with a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD,
Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
Voice operation is only available for con-
nected USB and iPod devices. (Remote CD
player optional and not available on all ve-
hicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or
choose an artist.
•“Change source to Bluetooth”
•“Change source to iPod”
•“Change source to USB”
•“Play artist Beethoven” “Play album Great-
est Hits” “Play song Moonlight Sonata”
“Play genre Classical”
Uconnect 3 Radio
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV Radio
289
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touch-
screen to see all of the music on your iPod or
USB device. Your Voice Command must
match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone
calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone-
book button is illuminated on your touch-
screen, your system is ready.
U.S. residents can visit:
• UconnectPhone.com for device compat-
ibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
•“Call John Smith”
•“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
•“Redial (call previous outgoing phone num-
ber)”
•“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push
the Phone button
and say “Call,” Then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in
your phone book. When a contact has mul-
tiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John
Smith work.”
Uconnect 3 Media
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV Media
Uconnect 3 Phone
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV Phone
MULTIMEDIA
290
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text mes-
sages. Push the Phone button
and say
Listen. (Must have compatible device paired
to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say: Reply.
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined mes-
sages and follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP:
Your device must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to
take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com for
U.S. residents. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later
supports reading incoming text messages
only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
1. Select “Settings.”
2. Select “Bluetooth.”
3. Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle.
4. Turn On “Show Notifications.”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
Climate (3C/3C NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle tempera-
tures hands-free and keep everyone comfort-
able while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle
is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
iPhone Notification Setting
291
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel (if
equipped).
Navigation (3C/3C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you
save time and become more productive when
you know exactly how to get to where you
want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 3C system. See your dealer to ac-
tivate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• For the 3C Uconnect System, say: “En-
ter state.”
• For the 3C NAV Uconnect System, say:
“Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Au-
burn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a Point Of Interest (POI) search,
push the VR button
. After the beep, say
“Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect Access — If Equipped (3C/3C
NAV)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. Some Uconnect Access
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will
NOT work without an operable 1X(voice/
data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is re-
quired to take advantage of the Uconnect
Access services in the next section of this
guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the “Apps” button on the 8.4-inch
touchscreen to get started. Detailed registra-
tion instructions can be found on the next
page.
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV Climate
Uconnect 3C/3C NAV Navigation
MULTIMEDIA
292
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle is not
connected to an oper-
able 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network,
the signal strength
bars on the “Apps”
button on the touch-
screen will show a single bar and a prohibi-
tion symbol to indicate your vehicle is not
connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network.
• Uconnect Access is available only on prop-
erly equipped vehicles purchased within
the continental United States, Alaska and
Hawaii when connected to an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network. Services
can only be used where coverage is avail-
able; see coverage map for details.
CALL
911
9-1-1 Call
Stolen Vehicle Assis-
tance
Remote Door Lock/
Unlock
Yelp Search
Remote Vehicle
Start**
Text
Voice Texting
Vehicle Finder Send ‘N Go
Remote Horn and
Lights
Vehicle Health Re-
ports**
Roadside Assistance
Call
Vehicle Health
Alert**
Theft Alarm Notifica-
tion
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is properly equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Register (3C/3C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Ac-
cess in your vehicle, you first need to register
with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 3C Registration
293
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will regis-
ter your vehicle and handle all of the
details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps
above. Or, press the “Apps
” button on
the touchscreen, then select the Uconnect
registration app to “Register By Web” to
complete the process using your device or
computer.
For further information, please visit
www.driveuconnect.com (U.S. residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian residents).
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it
senses a problem under the hood with one of
your vehicles key systems. For further infor-
mation go to the Mopar Owner Connect web-
site at mopar.com.
Mobile App (3C/3C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and sending a destination
from your phone to your vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your Uconnect
Access services, download the Uconnect
app to your mobile device. Use your Owner
Account login and password to open the
app.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can
begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Re-
mote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn
and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to
your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send ‘N Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the up-
per left corner of the app to bring up app
settings.
Voice Texting (3C/3C NAV)
You must be registered with Uconnect Access
and have a compatible MAP – enabled device
to use your voice to send a personalized text
message. (Not compatible with iPhone.)
1. To send a message, push the Phone but-
ton
. After the beep, say: “Send
message to John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dic-
tate the message you would like to send.
Wait for Uconnect to process your
message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your
message and provide a variety of options
to add to, delete, send or hear the mes-
Mobile App
MULTIMEDIA
294
sage again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if
you’re happy with your message, after the
beep, say “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access
and have a compatible MAP – enabled device
to use your voice to send a personalized text
message. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or
later supports reading incoming text mes-
sages only. To enable this feature on your
Apple iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
1. Select “Settings.”
2. Select “Bluetooth.”
3. Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle.
4. Turn On “Show Notifications.”
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to
send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen
must be illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (3C/3C NAV)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you
can use your voice to search for the most
popular places or things around you.
1. Push the VR button
. After the beep,
say: Launch YELP.
2. Once the YELP home screen appears on
the touchscreen, push the VR button
, then say: YELP search.
3. Listen to the system prompts and after the
beep, tell Uconnect the place or business
that you’d like Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can
reorganize the results by selecting either the
Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top
of the touchscreen display.
SiriusXM Travel Link (3C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie
listings, check a sports score or the5-day
weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a
suite of services that brings a wealth of infor-
mation right to your Uconnect 3C NAV sys-
tem. (Not available for 3C system.)
iPhone Notification Setting
Yelp
295
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•“Show fuel prices”
•“Show 5 - day weather forecast”
•“Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with
Voice Command.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural lan-
guage to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the
road and your hands on the wheel by letting
Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on
the steering wheel. After you hear a double
beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages
and many other useful requests.
Getting Started
Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone.
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the ve-
hicles sound system. Refer to “Uconnect
Phone” in “Multimedia” for a detailed
pairing procedure.
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free Available
Enable Siri
1 — Select Settings On Your iPhone
2 — Select General
3 — Select Siri
4 — Enable Siri
MULTIMEDIA
296
2. Push and Hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button
on
the steering wheel. After you hear the
familiar Siri "double beep," say a
command.
NOTE:
A push and release of the
button will
start normal embedded VR functions. The
push and hold, then release of the
button will start Siri functions.
3. After the double beep, begin speaking to
Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and ques-
tions:
• "Play Rolling Stones"
• "Send text message to John"
• "Read text message from Sarah"
• "Take me to the nearest coffee shop"
NOTE:
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and
volume while facing straight ahead to
ensure your command is understood.
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi-
cations from incoming calls and texts, allow-
ing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you
were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Pair Your iPhone
VR/Siri Button
Siri Eyes Free
297
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on
the touchscreen while typing a custom
message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can
be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming
calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only avail-
able on phones that support Bluetooth
MAP.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved.
Mopar and Uconnect are registered trade-
marks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trade-
mark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark
of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio
Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related
marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
For Uconnect system support, call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Resi-
dents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Resi-
dents).
MULTIMEDIA
298
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR
OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR
VEHICLE .................300
Prepare For The Appointment.......300
Prepare A List ................300
Be Reasonable With Requests ......300
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .300
FCA US LLC Customer Center ......300
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . .301
In Mexico Contact ..............301
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . .301
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ......301
Service Contract ..............301
WARRANTY INFORMATION . . .302
MOPARPARTS .............302
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS .................302
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. ..............302
In Canada...................302
PUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS ...................303
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
299
SUGGESTIONS FOR
OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure
to have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss ad-
ditional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue
to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems
or the specific work you want done. If you've
had an accident or work done that is not on
your maintenance log, let the service advisor
know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must
have your vehicle by the end of the day,
discuss the situation with the service advisor
and list the items in order of priority. At many
authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need
a rental, it is advisable to make these ar-
rangements when you call for an appoint-
ment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an autho-
rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer's autho-
rized dealer have the facilities, factory-
trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and of-
fice)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
300
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Ser-
vices LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing diffi-
culties, the manufacturer has installed spe-
cial TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional tele-
typewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dial-
ing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties
that require assistance can use the special
needs relay service offered by Bell Canada.
For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to con-
nect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract
for a vehicle to help protect you from the high
cost of unexpected repairs after the manufac-
turer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.
The manufacturer stands behind only the
manufacturer's service contracts. If you pur-
chased a manufacturer's service contract,
you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer's Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Ca-
nadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 Eng-
lish / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufactur-
er's service contract. It is not responsible for
any service contract other than the manufac-
turer's service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer's
service contract, and you require service after
the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
301
the ownership experience. You will be
pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve
any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion en-
gines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the
terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warran-
ties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accesso-
ries are available from an authorized dealer.
They are recommended for your vehicle in
order to help keep the vehicle operating at its
best.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should im-
mediately inform the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA
US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in in-
dividual problems between you, an au-
thorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-
424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Av-
enue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish
to report a safety defect to the Cana-
dian government should contact
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
302
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle De-
fect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS
• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or
Warranty Booklet. United States customers
may visit the Jeep Contact Us page at
www.jeep.com scroll to the bottom of the
page and select the “Contact Us” link, then
select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove
Compartment Material” from the left menu.
You can also purchase a copy by calling
1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-
387-1143 (Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you
prefer, additional printed copies of the
Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio
Manuals may be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com or by calling
1-877-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-
387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master Card,
American Express and Discover orders are
accepted.
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide elec-
tronic files are also available on the
Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT
websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select
“Owner/Service Manuals”. Then select your
desired model year and vehicle from the
drop down lists.
303
304
Access
Uconnect ..........251, 252, 256
Accessories..................245
Mopar ...................245
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off .................150, 152
On..................150, 152
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)..............149
Additives, Fuel................242
AirBag ....................101
Air Bag Operation ............103
Air Bag Warning Light ......100, 103
Driver Knee Air Bag ...........108
Enhanced Accident Response .112, 199
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ......199
Front Air Bag ...........101, 103
If A Deployment Occurs ........111
Knee Impact Bolsters .........108
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .113
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . .101
Transporting Pets ............126
Air Bag Light...........59, 100, 127
Air Bag Maintenance ............113
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ...................208
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......209
Air Conditioning Filter.........42, 210
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ......41
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . .209, 210
Air Conditioning System .......41, 209
Air Filter ...................208
Air Pressure, Tires ..............225
Alarm
Arm The System .............18
Disarm The System ............18
Alarm (Security Alarm) .........17, 60
Alarm System (Security Alarm) .......17
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ...........139
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........243
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......72
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...........65
Arming System (Security Alarm) ......17
Assist, Hill Start................74
Audio Jack ..................272
Automatic
Door Locks ............22
Automatic Headlights ..........29, 30
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .41
Automatic Transaxle ............136
Automatic Transmission ..........137
Fluid Level Check ............216
Auto Up Power Windows...........43
Back-Up ...................161
Back-Up Camera ..............161
Battery ..................61, 207
Charging System Light ..........61
Belts, Seat ..................127
Blind Spot Monitoring ............83
B-Pillar Location ..............221
Brake Assist System .............73
Brake Control System, Electronic .....73
Brake System
Parking ..................134
Warning Light ...............59
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......137
Bulb Replacement .............170
Bulbs, Light .................129
Camera ....................161
Capacities, Fluid ..............243
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................161, 193
Oil (Engine) ............205, 206
INDEX
305
Carbon Monoxide Warning .........127
Car Washes ..................235
Changing A Flat Tire .........180, 216
Chart, Tire Sizing ..............218
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .126
Checks, Safety ................126
Child Restraint................114
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..............116
Child Restraints .............114
Child Seat Installation .........124
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat
Belt ....................122
Infants And Child Restraints .....115
LATCH Positions ............118
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children ..................118
Older Children And Child Restraints .116
Seating Positions ............117
Child Safety Locks ..............22
Cleaning
Wheels ..................230
Climate Control.............34, 291
Manual ...................34
Clock .....................263
Clock Setting.................263
Compact Spare Tire .............229
Contract, Service ..............301
Cooling System ...............216
Coolant Capacity ............243
Inspection ................216
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .243
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......147
Cruise Light................67, 68
Customer Assistance ............300
Customer Programmable Features . . . .271
Daytime Running Lights ...........29
Dealer Service ................208
Defroster, Windshield............128
Diagnostic System, Onboard ........68
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...............207
Disabled
Vehicle Towing ..........195
Disturb ....................283
Do Not Disturb................297
Door Ajar ....................62
Door Ajar Light ................62
Door Locks, Automatic ............22
E-85 Fuel...................242
Electric Parking Brake ...........134
Electronic Brake Control System ......73
Anti-Lock Brake System .........72
Electronic Roll Mitigation ........78
Traction Control System .........75
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Control) ..................147
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....75
Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Light .....................61
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ........170
Jacking ...............180, 216
Jump Starting ..............191
Overheating ...............193
Engine .................205, 206
Air Cleaner ................208
Break-In Recommendations ......133
Checking Oil Level ...........207
Cooling ..................216
Exhaust Gas Caution ..........127
Jump Starting ..............191
Oil .....................243
Oil Filler Cap ...........205, 206
Oil Filter .................208
Oil Selection ...............243
Overheating ...............193
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ...............112, 199
Ethanol ....................242
INDEX
306
Exhaust Gas Caution ............127
Exhaust System ...............127
Exterior Lights ................129
Filters
Air Cleaner ................208
Air Conditioning ..........42, 210
Engine Oil ................208
Flashers
Hazard Warning .............170
Turn Signal ...........31, 67, 129
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel Requirements ...........242
Fluid Capacities ...............243
Fluid Leaks ..................129
Fluid Level Checks
Engine Oil ................207
Fluids And Lubricants ...........243
Fog Lights .................29, 30
Forward Collision Warning ..........85
Four Wheel Drive ..............139
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..........194
Front And Rear ParkSense System . . . .155
Front ParkSense System ..........155
Fuel
Additives .................242
Ethanol ..................242
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ..........161
Light ....................65
Materials Added .............242
Tank Capacity ..............243
Fuel, Flexible.................242
Fuses .....................173
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ......48
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .........161
Gear Select Lever Override ........194
General Information .......85, 87, 153
Glass Cleaning ................238
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) ......278
Hazard Warning Flasher ..........170
Headlights.................29,
30
Automatic ...............29, 30
Delay ....................30
Time Delay .................30
Head Restraints ................24
Head Rests ...................24
Heated Mirrors.................29
Hill Descent Control .............80
Hill Descent Control Indicator .......80
Hill Start Assist ................74
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ......48
Hood Release .................46
Instrument Cluster ..............67
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning.....237
Interior Appearance Care..........236
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ....31
Introduction ...................1
In Vehicle Features
Uconnect Access ............256
Inverter, Power.................55
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ......278
Jacking Instructions ............182
Jack Location ................180
Jack Operation .........180, 182, 216
Jump Starting ................191
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm ..............18
Disarm The Alarm .............18
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..............18
Key, Replacement...............15
Keys .......................13
Lane Change And Turn Signals .......31
Lane Change Assist ..............31
307
LaneSense ..................158
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..............94
Latches ....................129
Hood ....................46
Leaks, Fluid .................129
Life Of Tires .................227
Liftgate ..................47, 48
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......33
Light Bulbs ..................129
Lights .....................129
AirBag ............59, 100, 127
Brake Assist Warning ...........78
Brake Warning ...............59
Bulb Replacement ...........170
Cruise .................67, 68
Daytime Running .............29
Engine Temperature Warning ......61
Exterior ..................129
Fog .....................30
Hazard Warning Flasher ........170
Headlights .................29
Hill Descent Control Indicator .....80
Low Fuel ..................65
Malfunction Indicator
(Check Engine) ..............62
Park .....................67
Seat Belt Reminder ...........59
Security Alarm ..............60
Service ..................170
Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPMS) ................63, 87
Traction Control ..............78
Turn Signal ...........31, 67, 129
Warning (Instrument Cluster
Description) ..............61, 67
Loading Vehicle
Tires ....................221
Locks
Automatic Door ..............22
Child Protection ..............22
Low Tire Pressure System ..........87
Lug Nuts ...................241
Maintenance Free Battery .........207
Maintenance Schedule ...........202
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine)...............62
Manual, Service ...............303
Media
Hub ..................289
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ......22
Memory Seat..................22
Memory Seats And Radio ..........22
Mirrors .....................28
Heated ...................29
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......87
Mopar .....................245
Mopar Accessories .............245
Mopar Parts .................302
Navigation ...............273, 292
New Vehicle Break-In Period .......133
Occupant Restraints .............91
Oil, Engine
Capacity .................243
Checking .................207
Dipstick ..................207
Filter ...................208
Pressure Warning Light .........60
Recommendation ............243
Viscosity .................243
Oil Filter, Change ..............208
Oil Filter, Selection .............208
Oil Pressure Light...............60
Onboard Diagnostic System .........68
Operating Precautions ............68
Outlet
Power ....................52
Overheating, Engine ............193
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . .303
INDEX
308
Parking Brake ................134
ParkSense Active Park Assist .......157
ParkSense System, Front And Rear . . .155
ParkSense System, Rear ......154, 155
Pets ......................126
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) ......278
Phone (Pairing) ............278, 287
Phone (Uconnect) ..........278, 290
Placard, Tire And Loading
Information ................221
Power
Glass Sunroof ...............44
Inverter ...................55
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . .52
Windows ..................43
Power Shade
Open ....................45
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts......98
Preparation For Jacking ..........181
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .................98
Purchase Apps
Uconnect Access .........255, 294
Radial Ply Tires ...............226
Radio .....................289
Presets ...........264, 270, 271
Radio Frequency
General Information ......15, 17, 21
Radio Operation ...............264
Radio Screens ................268
Radio (Sound Systems) ..........264
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .....31, 32
Rear Camera .................161
Rear Cross Path ................83
Rear ParkSense System . . .154, 155, 161
Rear Wiper/Washer ..............33
Recreational Towing.............164
Shifting Into Power Transfer Unit
Neutral (N) ................166
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral
(N) .....................166
Shifting Out Of Power Transfer Unit
Neutral (N) ................167
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ................167
Refrigerant ..................210
Release, Hood .................46
Reminder, Seat Belt .............93
Remote Control
Starting System ..............
17
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm ..............18
Disarm The Alarm .............18
Remote Starting System ...........17
Replacement Keys ..............15
Replacement Tires .............227
Reporting Safety Defects..........302
Restraint, Head ................24
Restraints, Child...............114
Roll Over Warning................2
Rotation, Tires ................233
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .......127
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......129
Safety Defects, Reporting .........302
Safety, Exhaust Gas.............127
Safety Information, Tire ..........216
Safety Tips ..................126
Schedule, Maintenance ..........202
SD Card Port .................272
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage .................96
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . .98
Energy Management Feature ......98
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ......95
Lap/Shoulder Belts ............94
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .....96
Pregnant Women .............98
Seat Belt Extender ............97
309
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..........98
Seat Belt Reminder ...........93
Seat Belt Maintenance ...........236
Seat Belt Reminder..............93
Seat Belts ................92, 127
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........96
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Anchorage .................96
Child Restraint .............114
Extender ..................97
Front Seat ............92, 94, 95
Inspection ................127
Operating Instructions ..........95
Pregnant Women .............98
Pretensioners ...............98
Rear Seat ..................94
Reminder ..................59
Untwisting Procedure ..........96
Seats ....................22, 23
Head Restraints ..............24
Heated ...................23
Memory ...................22
Vented ...................24
Ventilated .................24
Security Alarm ..............17, 60
Arm The System .............18
Disarm The System ............18
Selec-Terrain .................144
Sentry Key Replacement ..........15
Service Assistance .............300
Service Contract ...............301
Service Manuals ...............303
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ........137
Power Transfer Unit, Shifting Into
Power Transfer Unit Neutral
(N) .................166, 167
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ............166
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ............167
Shift Lever Override.............194
Shoulder Belts.................94
Signals, Turn............31, 67, 129
Siri .......................296
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .........231
Snow Tires ..................229
Sound
Systems (Radio) .......272, 273
Spare Tire ...............229, 230
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ............148, 149
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ........150
Cancel ...................149
Distance Setting (ACC Only) . .149, 152
Mode Setting (ACC Only) .......152
Set.....................148
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......147
Starting .................17, 133
Remote ...................17
Starting Procedures.............133
Steering
Tilt Column .................27
Wheel, Heated ...............28
Wheel, Tilt .................27
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ..................250
Storage, Vehicle ................42
Stuck, Freeing ................194
Sunroof
Closing ...................45
Opening ..................45
Venting ...................45
Sun Roof ....................44
Supplemental Restraint System - Air
Bag.....................101
Sway Control, Trailer .............79
System, Remote Starting ..........17
Telescoping Steering Column ........27
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .41
Text Messaging .....283, 284, 291, 294
INDEX
310
Tilt Steering Column .............27
Time Delay, Headlight ............30
Tire And Loading Information Placard . .221
Tire Markings.................217
Tires............129, 224, 229, 233
Aging (Life Of Tires) ..........227
Air Pressure ...............224
Chains ...................231
Changing ..............180, 216
Compact Spare .............229
General Information .......224, 229
High Speed ................225
Inflation Pressures ...........225
Jacking ...............180, 216
Life Of Tires ...............227
Load Capacity ..............221
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .87
Pressure Warning Light .........63
Quality Grading .............233
Radial ...................226
Replacement ...............227
Rotation ..................233
Safety ...............216, 224
Sizes ....................218
Snow Tires ................229
Spare Tire .............229, 230
Spinning .................226
Tread Wear Indicators .........226
Wheel Nut Torque ............241
Tire Safety Information ...........216
Tire Service Kit.........185, 186, 190
To Open Hood .................46
Towing .................163, 195
Disabled Vehicle .............195
Recreational ...............164
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . .164
Traction Control ................75
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)..........79
Trailer Towing ................163
T
railer And Tongue Weight .......163
Trailer Towing Guide ............163
Trailer Weight ................163
Transaxle ...................136
Automatic ................136
Operation .................136
Transmission .................137
Automatic .............137, 216
Maintenance ...............216
Transporting Pets ..............126
Tread Wear Indicators............226
Turn Signals................31, 67
Uconnect
Access ............251, 252, 256
Account ...........252, 256, 259
Maintaining Your Account .......256
Registration ............252, 293
Remote Features ............259
Using Access ...............255
Uconnect Access ...........251, 292
In Vehicle Features ...........256
Purchase Apps ..........255, 294
Vehicle Health Alert .......259, 294
Yelp ....................295
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call ......276, 282
Receiving A Call .............276
Uconnect Phone . . . .276, 282, 283, 287
Uconnect Voice Command .....282, 286
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........233
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ......96
USB Port ...................272
Using Access
Uconnect .................255
Vehicle Loading ...............221
Vehicle Security Alarm
(Security Alarm) ..............17
Vehicle Storage ................42
V
entilated....................23
Voice Command ........282, 286, 288
311
Voice Recognition System
(VR) ..............282, 283, 286
Warning Flasher, Hazard ..........170
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Description).................63
Warning, Roll Over ...............2
Warranty Information ............302
Washer
Rear .....................33
Washers, Windshield .........31, 207
Washing Vehicle ...............235
Wheel And Wheel Trim ...........230
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care........230
Wind Buffeting ................45
Window Fogging ................42
Windows
Close ....................43
Down ....................43
Open ....................43
Power ....................43
Up......................43
Windshield Defroster ............128
Windshield Washers ..........31, 207
Fluid ....................207
Windshield Wiper Blades .........212
Windshield Wipers ..............31
Wiper Blade Replacement .........212
Wiper, Rear ...................33
INDEX
312
Important
Get warranty and other information online – you can
review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada)
homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable
year, make and model of your vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take their attention o the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver
while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be
done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or
texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply
with all local laws.
Driving and Alcohol
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and
your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Jeep
brand
vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
source for common questions. However, it is not a
substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance
procedures and important safety messages, please
consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the back cover
and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply
to your vehicle. For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada)
or your local Jeep
brand dealer.
2018 CHEROKEE USER GUIDE
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP”
(U.S. residents only).
www.jeep.com⁄en ⁄owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) provides special oers tailored to
your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information,
just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation ⁄ Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle
by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the
“Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow
the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
media and warranty booklet by visiting:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
Jeep.com (U.S.)
Jeep.ca (Canada)
18KL-926-AA
CHEROKEE
Fourth Edition, Rev 1
User Guide
